Home

5D Manual

1. So we sri aiictanig 150g Aperture 225 Shooting Movies SSS EE ISO speed during manual exposure shooting e With Auto A the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 e You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 12800 in 1 3 stop increments Under 2 ISO speed settings if you set ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H the maximum ISO speed for manual ISO speed setting will be expanded to H equivalent to 25600 Be aware that when you set Maximum to 25600 the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 12800 If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable p 148 you can set the ISO speed within ISO 200 12800 depending on the ISO speed range setting Under 2 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot be set p 129 130 for movie shooting QD Since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 20000 25600 may result in much noise it is designated as an expanded ISO speed displayed as H e If Minimum is set to L 50 and Maximum to H1 51200 or H2 102400 in ISO speed range and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the minimum setting for manual ISO range will be ISO 100 and the maximum will be H ISO 25600 The ISO speed cannot be expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200 102400 e Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommend
2. Sena aj Turn the lt gt dial to select Set up m Setup then press lt gt Start For still photos set the Display time MENU os and Repeat options then press the lt MENU gt button Display time Repeat Slide show Slide show Display time Repeat I Enable Disable 2 2 ua Slide Show Auto Playback SSS ee Slide show Start the slide show A te 46 images e Turn the lt gt dial to select Start ae YY SADT then press lt 1 gt eee oT gt After Loading image is displayed Start the slide show will start IME NU Ba Quit the slide show e To quit the slide show and return to the setting screen press the lt MENU gt button E To pause the slide show press lt gt During pause IH will be displayed on the upper left of the image Press lt gt again to resume the slide show e During auto playback you can press the lt INFO gt button to change the still photo display format p 250 e During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt 73 gt dial e During auto playback or pause you can turn the lt gt dial to view another image e During auto playback auto power off will not work The display time may vary depending on the image e To view the slide show on a TV set see pages 274 and 277 2 3 Viewing the Images on TV mum You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set WD e Adjust the movie s sound volume wit
3. When focus is achieved the AF point that achieved focus will be displayed and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will also light up e With evaluative metering the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved While you hold down the shutter button halfway the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot if desired 70 AF Selecting the AF Mode SS E e f focus cannot be achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt and AF status indicator lt gt in the viewfinder will blink If this occurs the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely Recompose the picture and try to focus again Or see When Autofocus Fails p 112 f t 21 Beep is set to Disable the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved e After achieving focus with One Shot AF you can lock the focus on a subject and recompose the shot This is called focus lock This is convenient when you want to focus a subject not covered by the Area AF frame Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF mode is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing While you hold down the shutter button halfway the subject will be focused continuously e The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken When the AF area selection mode is set to 61 point automatic selection p 72 the camera first uses the manually selected AF point to focus
4. Whenever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt sensor cleaning will be executed automatically A small sound may be heard During Sencar ceana the sensor cleaning the LCD monitor will display lt gt e You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter button halfway p 44 to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture e If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt c gt icon may not be displayed This is normal and not a problem um About Auto Power Off e To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after 1 minute of non operation To turn on the camera again just press the shutter button halfway p 44 e You can change the auto power off time with 2 Auto power off p 55 F If you set the power switch to lt OFF gt while an image is being recorded to the card Recording will be displayed and the power will turn off after the card finishes recording the image 34 Turning on the Power drasa Checking the Battery Level When the power switch is set to lt ON gt the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels A blinking battery icon a indicates that the battery will be exhausted soon Level 100 70 69 50 49 20 19 10 9 Battery Life Approx number of shots At 23 C 73 F At 0C 32 F Possible shots 950 850 e The figures above are based on a fully c
5. 4 e Before printing be sure to set the paper size e Certain printers cannot imprint the file number e f Bordered is set certain printers may imprint the date on the border e Depending on the printer the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border F e Under Adjust levels Manual cannot be selected e f you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining images select Resume Note that printing will not resume if you stop the printing and any of the following occurs e Before resuming the printing you changed the print order or deleted print ordered images e When you set the index you changed the paper setting before resuming the printing e When you paused the printing the card s remaining capacity was low e f a problem occurs during printing see page 310 314 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer m You can connect the camera to a personal computer and operate the camera to transfer images on the card to the personal computer This is called direct image transfer The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor The images transferred to the personal computer will be saved in the Pictures or My Pictures folder and organized in folders by shooting date q _ Before connecting the camera to the personal computer be sure to install the provided software EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk on CD ROM on the
6. 48 343 EE Dp ane wisce aces tacceett at et eed 21 ENS a a OEA 25 39 Chromatic aberration COrrection smn iisereeesnesniweottaare 150 Lock release cccccseseeeeeeeeees 40 Peripheral illumination COrrection aiid enccrccasenecsseasioe 149 Lens hood naruto seekasasienscceus sn 41 Live View shooting 0 68 199 Exposure simulation 207 Face detection Live mode AF setae ace E OIE 210 Grid display s s s 205 Information display 202 Live mode AF scceeeees 209 Manual focusing 216 Metering timer 2 208 Possible shots 0eeee 201 Quick Control 204 Quick mode AP 000 214 Silent shooting cccceeeeeeeeees 208 LOCK ce E 47 Long exposure noise reduction 146 LONG exposures sses eere 174 a a M Manual exposure 168 225 Magnification Start position 258 Magnified view n s 216 257 Main Dial sscwidecdateaseatt ahrevonnatas cache 45 Malfunction sGiuseecssecasnadnnutansseeneccas 364 Manual exposure 168 225 Manual focusing 113 216 Manual reset cccccsceeeeeeeeees 157 Manual selection AF 72 75 Maximum aperture eee 85 Maximum bursSt 000008 123 125 Medium Image recording quality 123 293 Memory card gt Card MGMUliznssinecededsnsbranett sassanaacoteawuadennahs 51 My M n si nerie 337 Setting procedure s esse
7. 5200 gt e The color temperature can be set SET ali from approx 2500K to 10000K in 100K increments WD When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source set white balance correction magenta or green as necessary e If you set lt gt to the reading taken with a commercially available color temperature meter take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate for the difference between the color temperature meter s reading and the camera s color temperature reading 141 WB White Balance Correction mu You can correct the white balance that has been set This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters White Balance Correction Maths o 1 Select WB Shift Bkt Secor Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 1 2 53 e Under the 62 tab select WB 150 speed settings TEE Shift Bkt then press lt gt White balance LAW Custom White Balance WE Shift Bet 0 0 40 Color space sRGB 2 Set the white balance correction e Use lt lt gt to move the m mark to the desired position Re cc 1 Bis for blue A is amber M is ee EN magenta and G is green The color in the respective direction will be c
8. M oi q External microphone L Da 3 HDMI Cable CE Stereo AV Cable HTC 100 2 9 m 9 5 ft AVC DC400ST 1 3 m 4 3 ft iT Wireless File eee Transmitter WFT E7 EOS DIGITAL 4 Solution Disk I k E ae Interface Cable Wireless LAN IFC 200U 1 9 m 6 2 ft mE E Interface Cable amp 500U 4 7 m 15 4 ft CF card Ste Oo access point Card a a DHC SDXC P ictBridge compatible printer memory card 1 Battery Pack LP E6N can also be used Leather Case EH20 L The length of all cables is approx m ft 363 Troubleshooting Guide mau If a problem occurs with the camera first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center Power Related Problems The battery pack does not recharge If the battery s remaining capacity p 344 is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged Do not recharge any battery pack other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N The charger s lamp blinks at high speed If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery pack or if communication with the battery pack non Canon battery packs is not possible the protective circuit will terminate the charging and the orange lamp will blink quickly at a regular interval If there is a problem with the battery charger or battery
9. N 1 Press the lt gt button gt The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder In AF point expansion modes effective adjacent AF points will also be displayed Inthe Zone AF mode the selected zone will be displayed 2 Select an AF point The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt the lt lt s2 gt If you press lt 2 gt straight down the center AF point or center Zone will be selected The lt gt dial selects an AF point in the horizontal direction and the lt 3 gt dial selects an AF point in the vertical direction Inthe Zone AF mode turning the lt gt or lt gt dial will change the Zone in a looping sequence AF Point Display Indications Pressing the lt E gt button lights up the AF points that are cross type AF points for high precision autofocusing The blinking AF points are horizontal line sensitive For details see page 78 F When you press the lt E gt button the LCD panel displays the following e 61 point automatic selection AF and Zone AF manual selection of zone __ AF e Single point Spot AF and Single point AF SEL Center SEL AF Off center e With AF5 Manual AF pt selec pattern you can set either Stops at AF area edges or Continuous p 104 74 AF Area Selection Modes ma Single point Spot AF Manual selection Although this is the same as single point AF the oe tee selecte
10. Pe 4 Ee Manual py Manual i a I i E i 5 T 7 au w Adjust brightness Adjust brightness Automatic adjustment Manual adjustment QW While Auto is set be careful not to obstruct the round external light sensor p 20 on the right of the LCD monitor with your finger etc F To check the image s exposure looking at the histogram is recommended p 254 285 Changing Image Playback Settings a a M Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera s LCD monitor and on the personal computer instead of horizontally The setting of this feature can be changed 1 Select Auto rotate Under the 1 tab select Auto rotate then press lt gt Set the auto rotation Select the desired option then press lt G1 gt e Ona amp The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera s LCD monitor and on the computer On The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer e Off The vertical image is not automatically rotated QD Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation was Off They will not rotate even if you later switch it to On for playback E e Immediately after image capture the vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review e Ifthe vertical image is taken while the camera is
11. e Same as last magnification from center The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the magnified view with the lt L gt gt or lt Q gt button The magnified view starts from the image center F With images taken with Live mode or X Live mode p 209 the magnified view starts from the image center 258 1 Comparing Images Two Image Display You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor Set the two image display e During image playback press the ops lt m D gt button C gt Two images will be displayed The X currently selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame 2 Select the images to be compared e Pressing lt 1 gt switches the blue frame between the two images Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select an image Repeat step 2 to select the other image to be compared e By pressing the lt Q gt button you can set the same magnification and magnified area for both images The magnification settings will match those of the image not highlighted in blue e By holding the lt gt gt button you can display the image highlighted in blue as a single image e To return to the single image display press the lt gt button 3 E e Magnified view jump display setting ratings protecting the image and deleting the image are possible e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the shoo
12. indicates the bracketing direction and correction amount e Pressing the lt T gt button will cancel Bracket all the WB Shift Bkt settings i Linas Eshit EE Clear all Press lt amp 7 gt to exit the setting and Bracket SET als Bracket ae return to the menu Bracketing Sequence The images will be bracketed in the following sequence 1 Standard white balance 2 Blue B bias and 3 Amber A bias or 1 Standard white balance 2 Magenta M bias and 3 Green G bias Fil e During WB bracketing the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to approx one third the normal number e You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing If you set AEB in combination with white balance bracketing a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot Since three images are recorded for one shot the card will take longer to record the shot When white balance bracketing is set the white balance icon will blink You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing p 322 BKT stands for bracketing 143 MEW Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically ma If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer The default setting is Standard Wit
13. AF3 One Shot USM lens electronic MF For the lenses below which have an electronic focusing ring you can set whether to use the electronic focusing ring EF50mm f 1 0L USM EF300mm f 2 8L USM EF600mm f 4L USM EF85mm f 1 2L USM EF400mm f 2 8L USM EF1200mm f 5 6L USM EF85mm f 1 2L II USM EF400mm f 2 8L II USM EF28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF200mm f 1 8L USM EF500mm f 4 5L USM USM lens electronic MF on Enable after One Shot AF Enable after One Shot AF Seon After AF operates if you keep pressing Disable after One Shot AF Sor Pabia le AF node OFF the shutter button you can focus manually Takes effect with lenses that Disable after One Shot AF have electronic focus rings ES Help After AF operates manual focusing is disabled OFF Disable in AF mode When the lens focus mode switch is set to AF manual focusing is disabled 98 TM Customizing AF Functions SESEE_ AF assist beam firing Enables or disables the EOS dedicated Speedlite s AF assist beam AF assist beam firing ON Enable Enable ON The external Speedlite emits the AF Sigh i ae assist beam when necessary OFF Disable The external Speedlite will not emit the Specify AF assist beam opera tion on an external Speedlite EB Help AF assist beam This prevents the AF assist beam from disturbing others IR IR AF assist beam only Among external Speedlites only models with an infrared AF assist bea
14. Extender EF2x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 III EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x With built in Ext 1 4x EF200mm f 2 8L II USM Extender EF2x EF28 105mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x Extender EF1 4x EF300mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF2x 82 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF2x EF70 300mm 4 5 5 6 DO IS USM EF80 200mm 4 5 5 6 EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF2x EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 EF90 300mm f 4 5 5 6 EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF2x EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 USM EF90 300mm 4 5 5 6 USM EF70 200mm f 4L USM Extender EF1 4x EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 Il EF100 200mm f 4 5A EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 Il USM EF100 300mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF70 210mm 3 5 4 5 USM EF75 300mm 4 5 6 III EF100 300mm f 5 6 EF70 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF75 300mm 4 5 6 II USM EF100 300mm f 5 6L EF70 300mm f 4 5 6L IS USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM Group F Autofocusing with only 47 points is possible Not possible with all 61 AF points All of the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 61 point automatic selection AF E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focus
15. gt The movie recording format will be MOV o Cards that can record movies e When shooting movies use a large capacity card with a fast writing reading speed as shown in the table Compression CF Card SD Card Method p 233 IPB 10 MB sec or faster 6 MB sec or faster ALL I l only 30 MB sec or faster 20 MB sec or faster e If you use a slow writing card when shooting movies the movie may not be recorded properly Also if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed the movie may not play back properly e f you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie you will need an even faster card e To check the card s reading writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site Shooting Movies m Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to lt J gt lt P gt or lt B gt autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene s current brightness Exposure control will be the same for the three shooting modes 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt G gt lt P gt or lt B gt Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt gt The reflex mirror will make a sound then the image will appear on the LCD monitor Focus the subject Before shooting focus with AF or manual focus p 209 216 When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF mode A Shoot the movie Press t
16. lt ON gt 2 Press the shutter button halfway gt The Image Stabilizer will operate 3 Take the picture When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder press the shutter button completely to take the picture QD e The Image Stabilizer cannot correct subject blur when the subject moves at the time of exposure e For bulb exposures set the IS switch to lt OFF gt If lt ON gt is set instead Image Stabilizer misoperation may occur e The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat e The Image Stabilizer may not be effective when you use the EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens for panned shots E e The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens focus mode switch set to either lt AF gt or lt MF gt e When using a tripod you can still shoot with the IS switch set to lt ON gt with no problem However to save battery power setting the IS switch to lt OFF gt is recommended e The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted ona monopod 42 Basic Operation mx Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob SA a A Turn the knob left or right so that the gt AF points in the viewfinder look sharp If the knob is difficult to turn remove the eyecup p 187 E If the camera s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg sold separ
17. 383 Specifications Grid display Three types Zoom magnification Approx 1 5x 10x starting magnification and position settable Image browsing methods Single image jump by 10 or 100 images by shooting date by folder by movies by stills by rating Image rotate Possible Ratings Provided Movie playback Enabled LCD monitor video audio OUT HDMI OUT built in speaker Slide show All images by date by folder movies stills or by rating Image protect Possible Copying images Possible e Post Processing of Images In camera RAW image processing Brightness correction White balance Picture Style Auto Lighting Optimizer High ISO speed noise reduction JPEG image recording quality Color space Peripheral illumination correction Distortion correction and Chromatic aberration correction Resize Possible e Direct Printing Compatible printers PictBridge compatible printers Printable images JPEG and RAW images Print ordering DPOF Version 1 1 compatible e Image Transfer Transferrable images Still photos JPEG RAW RAW JPEG images Movies e Custom Functions Custom Functions 13 My Menu registration Possible Custom shooting modes Register under Mode Dial s C1 C2 C3 Copyright information Entry and inclusion enabled Interface Audio video OUT Digital terminal Analog video Compatible with NTSC PAL stereo audio output Personal computer communication Direct printing Hi Speed USB or eq
18. During autofocusing if the subject moves away from the manually selected AF point focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by the Area AF frame E With Al Servo AF the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved Also the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Al Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode Al Focus AF switches the AF mode from One Shot AF to Al Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving e After the subject is focused in One Shot AF mode if the subject starts moving the camera will detect the movement and change the AF mode automatically to Al Servo AF F When focus is achieved in the Al Focus AF mode with the Servo mode active the beeper will sound softly However the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will not light up Note that focus will not be locked in this case 71 Selecting the AF Area mun 61 AF points are provided for AF You can select the AF point s suiting the scene or subject q Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ For details see Lenses and Usable AF Points on page 79 AF Area Selection Mode You can select one of six AF area selection modes See the next page for the selection procedure Single point Spot AF Manual selection For pinpoint focusing Single point AF Manual selection Select one AF point t
19. EA CE ey O Automatically set Auto ISO oOlolololo ae i ISO speed nM Manual Ololololo Oln M Automatic selection SA GJ mode Picture Style Manual selection OlOIOIOIO O Auto O OloOlololo O Preset 2 O White balance Custom OlIOoOlIOoOIOIO O Color temperature setting OIOIOIOTO O Correction Bracketing Cur emcee a Zea O Auto Lighting Optimizer Ololololo O tans ab arration Peripheral illumination correction O O O O O O O correction Chromatic aberration correction O lOlolololo O Long exposure noise reduction Lo El High ISO speed noise reduction Ololololo O Highlight tone priority MA e O Multiple exposures OIOIOIOIO HDR shooting OIOIOIO sRGB OlOlIOIOJO O Color space Adobe RGB ORE Sane ais 760 O One Shot AF OloOolololoO Mive AF mode Al Servo AF OloOolololo AFE AF APU 24 Al Focus AF OoOlolololo AF area selection mode OlOlOlO Wih aai except E3 1 The amp icon indicates still photo shooting in the movie shooting mode 2 If used during movie shooting it will switch to AiB 352 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode _ _ _ _ _ _ ______S___ Se SS SS eee EE Still Photos Movies P Tv Avi MIB o ji AF point selection ena ae With AFD except CAS AF assist beam Ololololo as Manual focu
20. INFO Shooting Information Display Sample Information for Movies Shooting time Playback time Time code 102 0027 i Playback tag Shutter speed Aperture Shooting mode S a Are 400 45200 35 3 0 0 0 Movie recording S mpr Ves Bt sRGB Movie file size size EIA 01 11 2012 13 30 00 Frame rate Compression method e About the Highlight Alert When L gt 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable overexposed highlight areas will blink To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again e About the AF Point Display When L 13 AF point disp is set to Enable the AF point that B achieved focus will be displayed in red If automatic AF point selection was used multiple AF points may be displayed in red 253 INFO Shooting Information Display About the Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation The display can be switched with L gt 3 Histogram disp Brightness Display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image s brightness level The jh horizontal axis indicates the brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right Darkmage while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level The more pixels there are toward the lef
21. QD e Images shot with highlight tone priority set to Enable images of which the aspect ratio is other than 3 2 p 206 or those with cropping information appended p 326 cannot be selected as the first single exposure e Auto Lighting Optimizer peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be disabled regardless of the settings of the image selected as the first single exposure e The ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first image will also be set for the subsequent images e lf the first image s Picture Style is Auto the Standard Picture Style will be set for the subsequent images e You cannot select an image taken with another camera 183 Multiple Exposures F e You can also select a multiple exposure image as the first single exposure e If you select Deselect img the selected image will be canceled Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting lt a a When On Func ctrl is set and you have not finished shooting the set a number of exposures you can press the hie 2 lt L gt gt button to view the merged te multiple exposure image so far You can Return to previous screen gt g check how it looks and the exposure Not possible when On ContShtng is set If you press the lt 1 gt button the operations possible during multiple exposure shooting will be displayed Return to Th
22. a still subject the focus will be locked You can then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture This is called focus lock Shooting a Moving Subject In the lt E gt mode if the subject moves distance to camera changes while or after you focus Al Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject continuously As long as the Area AF frame covers the subject while you press the shutter button halfway the focusing will be continuous When you want to take the picture press the shutter button completely 67 43 Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor This is called Live View shooting For details see page 199 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt z 2 Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor e Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor 7 3 Focus the subject e Aim the center AF point lt gt on the subject Press the shutter button halfway to ied focus E gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound A Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automati
23. etc 90 quickly in any direction Case 6 OY FONSUDIACIS inat MANJE Rhythm gymnastics etc 91 speed and move erratically 87 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SSS SSS SSS SSS SSS Case 1 Versatile multi purpose setting Oo AF EH f ba i ATAF contig toot fe Case k Versatile multi purpose HE setting Tracking sensitivity Accel decel tracking o oF AF pt auto switching i Help FR Detail set Default settings e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 0 Standard setting suited for any moving subject Works with many subjects and scenes Select Case 2 to Case 6 in the following cases when obstacles enter AF points when the subject tends to stray from AF points when you want to focus a subject that suddenly appears or when the subject moves dramatically up down left or right Case 2 Continue to track subject ignoring possible obstacles oOo AF EH f 0O TET AFLAT config tool a Case 2 Continue to track subjects ead ignoring possible obstacles Tracking sensitivity oo Accel decel tracking g o a A AF pt auto switching o n CR Help FR Detail set Default settings e Tracking sensitivity Locked on 1 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 0 The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays fr
24. f you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts do not touch the internal parts There is a possibility of an electrical shock e Do not disassemble or modify the equipment High voltage internal parts can cause electrical shock e Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens Doing so may damage your vision Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants including when in use Straps or cords may accidentally cause choking electrical shock or injury Choking or injury may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory If a child or infant swallows a part or accessory consult a physician immediately e Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places Likewise store the battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short circuit This is to prevent a fire excessive heat electrical shock or burn e Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital check if it is allowed Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane s instruments or the hospital s medical equipment To prevent a fire and electrical shock follow the safeguards below e Always insert the power plug all the way in e Do not handle a power plug with wet hands e When unplugging a power plug grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord e Do not scratch cut or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy obj
25. f you set AF4 Orientation linked AF point to L Select separate AF points you can set the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone separately for vertical and horizontal shooting p 103 e With AF4 Selectable AF point you can change the number of manually selectable AF points p 100 T About the AF Sensor memm The camera s AF sensor has 61 AF points The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point With f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses high precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center Depending on the lens attached to the camera the number of usable AF points and AF pattern will differ For details see pages 79 to 85 Diagram Cross type focusing f 4 horizontal f 5 6 vertical Cross type focusing f 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal Dual cross type focusing f 2 8 right diagonal f 2 8 left diagonal f 5 6 vertical f 5 6 horizontal f 5 6 vertical focusing These focusing sensors are geared to obtain higher precision focusing with f 2 8 or larger maximum aperture lenses A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus subjects that may be difficult to focus They cover the five vertical AF points at the center These focusing sensors are geared to obtain high precision focusing with f 4 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since they have a horizontal pattern they can detect vertical lines These focusing sensors are geared for f 5
26. gt CF card selection icon lt f gt SD card indicator ISO speed p 126 lt gt AEB p 172 lt ISO gt ISO speed p 126 Metering mode p 169 a Evaluative metering lt D gt Highlight tone Partial metering priority p 148 CJ Spot metering C Center weighted average metering ISO ongan W Pe 3 2 101 213 IMSTBIMS123 S TTT TTT TT TT SS RAWEIS RAW GA ara Exposure level indicator Exposure compensation amount p 171 AEB range p 172 Flash exposure compensation amount p 190 Battery check p 35 Image recording quality p 121 lt 4 gt Flash exposure L Large compensation p 190 M Medium S1 Small 1 S2 Small 2 Fine 3 Small 3 Fine RAW MAW Medium RAW SM Small RAW 22 Viewfinder Information Nomenclature Spot metering circle p 170 Area AF frame p 73 Focusing screen Grid p 59 Eis papaaao E aoaaa J aoaaa E aagana PIEIeIeIe PIPE lt O gt Single AF point lt 2 gt S pot AF single point p 75 lt ISO gt ISO speed p 126 lt 2 gt Warning E dit iQataWardr2s83 150 51101 MAAANAAANNAAAAADY D 02 lt gt lt qwama gt Battery check a p 35 lt gt AE lock p 173 AEB in progress p 172 lt gt Flash ready p 190 Improper FE lock warning lt 4 gt FE lock p 190 FEB in progress p 197 lt u gt High speed sync p 196 Exposure level indicator lt B gt Flash exposure AEB range p 1
27. lt gt dial lt G1 gt On the screen that appears turn the lt z gt dial to select the image recording quality then press lt gt 121 M0 Setting the Image Recording Quality SSS ee a Image recording Quality Setting Examples AL only Image quality Standard JL Uo 9 RAW Fa HED SE JPEG iL dl aM av Gi wi 5 453 WW AL Image quality Standard GED ipee IL 2M See E98 RAW A wa sao JPEG iL aL aM dM iSi a 53 only Image quality Standard GER JIM S7eow saan 395 RAW A go WD sao JPEG iL dL aM dM Si a 453 S Em AM Image quality Standard mkt PP OEE Seated 9987 RAW A m wa sep JPEG Ci L aL dM aM dsi ai 52 53 F e f Jis set for both RAW and JPEG L will be set e The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD panel 122 M0 Setting the Image Recording Quality SSS ET Guide to Image Recording Quality Settings Approx _ Pixels Recorded Printing FileSize Possible Maximum Image oan megapixels Size MB Shots Burst AL A2 or 7 0 1010 5 16270 22M AL larger 3 7 1930 1930 30990 4M 9 8M A3 or 3 8 1860 1860 29800 aM l larger 2 0 3430 3430 55000 JPEG 451 ey A4 or 2 5 2810 2810 45140 d S1 l larger 1 3 5240 5240 83980 x Around S2 2 5M 9x13 cm 1 4 5030 5030 80520 S3 2 0 3M
28. lt D gt icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when highlight tone priority is enabled 148 1721 Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction m Peripheral light fall off occurs in lenses whose characteristics make the image corners look darker Color fringing along subject outlines also is a chromatic aberration Light fall off and color fringing can be corrected The default setting is Enable for both corrections Peripheral Illumination Correction Mah a 1 Select Lens aberration asa aan correction image review 2 sec Under the 831 tab select Lens Beep Enable A Release shutter without card ON aberration correction then press Lens aberration correction lt GE gt Lens aberration correction 2 Select the setting EF24 105mm f 4L I5 USM e Check that Correction data Correction data available available is displayed for the Peripheral ilumin Enable attached lens Disable e Turn the lt gt dial to select ME ta iem Peripheral illumin then press lt G gt Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on page 151 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected 4p Depending on shooting conditions noise may appear on the image periphery F e The correction amount applied will be slightly lower than the maximum
29. page in step 2 select RAW JPEG transfer and select the image to be transferred JPEG only RAW only or RAW JPEG Transferring Images to a Personal Computer T tM Select the Images to be Transferred Sel lmage E Resize Rating Slide show Image transfer Image jump wires ft Image transfer Image sel transfer RAW JPEG transfer JPEG only Image sel transter v Images to transfer gt Images failed trans Images transferred Sel Image Sel All image ME NU 5 1 2 3 4 Select Image transfer e Under the gt 2 tab select Image transfer then press lt gt Select Image sel transfer Select Image sel transfer then press lt 1 gt Select Sel lmage e Select Sel Image then press lt gt Select the images to be transferred e Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be transferred then press lt 1 gt Turn the lt gt dial to display the lt v gt on the screen s upper left then press lt 6 gt Ifyou press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt 74 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt 7 gt dial clockwise e To select other images to be transferred repeat step 4 To return to the screen in step 3 press the lt MENU gt button E When Sel Image is selected you can check the image s transfer status on the
30. s recharge performance level p 344 If the battery performance is poor replace the battery pack with a new one The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Often activating only the AF without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often e Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period The camera turns off by itself e Auto power off is in effect If you do not want auto power off to take effect set 2 Auto power off to Disable p 55 Even if 2 Auto power off is set to Disable the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min The camera s power does not turn off Shooting Related Problems The lens cannot be attached e The camera cannot be used with EF S or EF M lenses p 39 365 Troubleshooting Guide SS a The viewfinder is dark Install a recharged battery pack in the camera p 28 No images can be shot or recorded e The card is not properly inserted p 31 e If you are using an SD card slide the card s write protect switch to the Write Erase setting p 31 e Ifthe card is full replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make room p 31 283 If you try to focus in the One Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder blinks a pictu
31. then ISO speed range 100 25600 Auto ISO range E press lt gt Min shutter spd Auto Min shutter spd Set the desired minimum shutter Shutter speed speed Aut i e Turn the lt gt dial to select the AUTO 1 250 1 125 1 60 V30 W15 1 8 1 4 shutter speed then press lt gt ta Sg gt The menu reappears EEJ Hep 4 e f a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with Auto ISO range a shutter speed slower than the Min shutter spd will be set to obtain a standard exposure e With flash photography Min shutter spd will not be applied 130 313 Selecting a Picture Style mau By selecting a Picture Style you can obtain image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject The Picture Style is set automatically to lt E Al gt Auto in the lt Gf gt mode Picture Style Choose image effects to suit the subject or scene Picture Style Standard 03 004 Ban Bes 1 Press the lt C gt button Select 212 Turn the lt gt dial to select 42 gt then press lt 6 gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Select a Picture Style Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired Picture Style then press lt G1 gt The Picture Style will be set and the camera will be ready to shoot E You can also select the Picture Style with t 493 Picture Style
32. 0 3 19520 19520 312420 A2 or RAW 22M jaor 27 1 260 13 18 RAW MEW 10M ASON i aig 370 10 11 larger raw 5 5M ARON ea 480 12 15 larger RAW 22M A2 or larger AL 22M A2 or larger RER sey ENA RAW E E oE JPEG ST 5 5M A4 or larger AL 22M A2 or larger TAEAO R20 AAT 1 2 is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame 2 e S2 and 3 will be in Fine quality e The file size possible shots and maximum burst during continuous shooting are based on Canon s testing standards 3 2 aspect ratio ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style using an 8 GB CF card These figures will vary depending on the subject card brand aspect ratio ISO speed Picture Style Custom Functions and other settings e The maximum burst applies to lt HiH gt high speed continuous shooting Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA UDMA mode 7 128 GB card based on Canon s testing standards 3 is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site 123 M0 Setting the Image Recording Quality SS el F e f you select both RAW and JPEG the same image will be recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image recording quality that was set The two images will be recorded with the same file numbers file extension JPG for JPEG and CR2 for RAW e The image recording quality icons are as follows RAW M Medium RAW S Small RAW JPEG Fine al Normal L Large M Medium
33. 131 313 Selecting a Picture Style a a E Picture Style Characteristics Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene The colors will look vivid especially for blue skies greenery and sunsets in nature outdoor and sunset scenes 35 Standard The image looks vivid sharp and crisp This is a general purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes 2 P Portrait For nice skin tones The image looks softer Suited for close up portraits By changing the Color tone p 134 you can adjust the skin tone L Landscape For vivid blues and greens and very sharp and crisp images Effective for impressive landscapes N Neutral This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer For natural colors and subdued images 22 F Faithful This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer When the subject is captured under a daylight color temperature of 5200K the color is adjusted colorimetrically to match the subject s color Images will appear dull and subdued F If the desired color tone is not obtained with Auto use another Picture Style 132 Monochrome 31 Selecting a Picture Style Creates black and white images QD Black and white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color If you want to later shoot pictures in color make sure the Monochrome setting has been canceled When Monochrome is selected lt B W gt
34. 25600 in whole stop increments 50 speed settings 80 speed Auto ISO speed range 100 25600 Auto 0 range 100 12800 Min shutter spd Auto Auto 0 range Minimum Maximum 100 12800 OK Cancel Auto 0 range Minimum Maximum 100 25600 OK Cancel 1 Select Auto ISO range Select Auto ISO range then press lt G1 gt 2 Set the minimum limit e Select the minimum limit box then press lt 6 amp gt e Turn the lt gt dial to select the minimum limit ISO speed then press lt G1 gt 3 Set the maximum limit e Select the maximum limit box then press lt gt Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the maximum limit ISO speed then press lt G1 gt A Exit the setting e Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt 61 gt gt The menu reappears Fl The Minimum and Maximum settings will also apply to the ISO speed safety shifts minimum and maximum ISO speed p 323 129 ISO Setting the ISO Speed a uUam Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO When Auto ISO is set you can set the minimum shutter speed 1 250 sec to 1 sec so that the automatically set shutter speed is not too slow This is convenient in the lt P gt and lt Av gt modes when you use a wide angle lens to shoot a moving subject You can minimize both camera shake and subject blur ISO speed settings Select Min shutter spd ISO speed Auto Select Min shutter spd
35. 3 gt dial and select the wide angle W or telephoto T end Pressing lt 67 gt will turn off the purple frame and make the adjustment possible Turn the lt 3 gt dial to adjust as desired then press lt 1 gt The adjustable range is 20 steps Setting it toward will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shift the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus For a zoom lens repeat step 4 and adjust it for the wide angle W and telephoto T ends After completing the adjustment press the lt MENU gt button to return to the screen in step 1 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Adjust by lens then press lt Ge gt The menu will reappear 5 Check the result of the adjustment Take a picture and play back the image p 250 to check the adjustment result When the resulting picture is focused in front of the targeted point adjust toward the Aw side When the resulting picture is focused behind the targeted point adjust toward the side If necessary do the adjustment again Fl When shooting with the intermediate range focal length of a zoom lens the AF s point of focus is corrected relative to the adjustments made for the wide angle and telephoto ends Even if only the wide angle or telephoto end has been adjusted a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range 110 ta
36. EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 Ill EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 III USM For information on discontinued lenses refer to your local Canon Web site 213 Using AF to Focus Xa eS Quick Mode AF The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One Shot AF mode p 70 using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting Although you can focus the target area quickly the Live View image will be interrupted momentarily during the AF operation In AF area selection modes other than 61 point automatic selection AF you can manually select the AF point or zone In the lt 45 gt mode 61 point automatic selection AF is set automatically Area AF frame 1 Display the Live View image e Press the lt R gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor e Ifthe AF area selection mode is set to 61 point automatic selection AF the Area AF frame will be displayed In other modes the AF point will be displayed as a small frame e The larger rectangular frame is the magnifying frame 2 Select the AF area selection mode e Press the lt EJ gt button Each time you press the lt M Fn gt button the AF area selection mode changes 214 Using AF to Focus 3 Select the AF point The AF point selection will change in the direction you tilt the lt gt If you press lt 4 gt straight down the center AF point or center Zone will be selected e You can also use the lt s gt and lt g
37. Enter author s name 3 Enter text XXXXX KKK e Press the lt Q gt button and the text palette will be highlighted in a color frame Text can be entered Operate the lt 3 gt dial or lt gt to move the and select the desired character Then press lt gt to enter it e You can enter up to 63 characters To delete a character press the lt 1 gt button A Exit the setting e After entering the text press the lt MENU gt button gt The information will be saved and the screen will return to step 2 158 TAM Setting Copyright Information ee Checking the Copyright Information Display copyright info When you select Display copyright Author info in step 2 on the preceding page ROI TOOK you can check the Author and Copyright Copyright information that you Canon Inc entered Deleting the Copyright Information When you select Delete copyright information in step 2 on the a preceding page you can delete the Author and Copyright information F You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility provided software p 394 159 7 Setting the Color Space mau The range of reproducible colors is called the color space With this camera you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB For normal shooting SRGB is recommended The color space is set automatically to sRGB in the lt J gt mode 1 Select Color space e Unde
38. Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus E Clearing All AF Microadjustments When i Clear all appears at the bottom of the screen pressing the lt T gt button will clear all the adjustments made for All by same amount and Adjust by lens Notes for AF Microadjustment QD e The AF s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject conditions brightness zoom position and other shooting conditions Therefore even if you perform AF Microadjustment focus may still not be achieved at the suitable position e The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings p 56 However the setting itself will be Disable Fl It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will shoot This will make the adjustment more precise e Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended e For checking the adjustment result shooting at the ML image recording quality is recommended e The adjustment amount of one step varies depending on the maximum aperture of the lens Keep adjusting shooting and checking the focus repeatedly to adjust the AF s point of focus e AF adjustment is not possible for the Live mode and amp Live mode contrast AF 111 When Autofocus Fails sue Autofocus can fail to achieve focus viewfinder s focus confirmation light lt gt blinks with certain subjects such as the following Subjects difficult to focus e Very low contrast subject
39. Mirror lockup OFF will appear External Speedlite control Select the desired item Flash firing Enable Select the menu option to be set then E TTL Il meter Evaluative E Flash sync speed in Av mode AUTO press gt Flash function settings Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Flash firing Eemal Speedlite control To enable flash photography set Flash firing i Enable Enable To enable only the AF assist Disable beam to be emitted set Disable E TTL Il meter External Speedie Conia For normal flash exposures set it to Evaluative lf Average is set the flash E TTL Ii meter Evaluative exposure will be averaged for the entire Average metered scene Flash exposure compensation may be necessary This setting is for advanced users 193 TEM Setting the Flash iat Flash sync speed in Av mode Flash sync speed in Av mode You can set the flash sync speed for Auto AUTO flash photography in the aperture priority 1 200 1 60sec auto te AE Av mode 1 200 sec fixed AUTO Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1 200 sec to 30 sec to suit the scene s brightness High speed sync is also possible 0a 1 200 1 60 sec auto Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low light conditions It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake However while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash the ba
40. OOOO W Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF24mm f 1 4L USM EF50mm f 1 8 EF200mm f 1 8L USM EF24mm f 1 4L II USM EF50mm f 1 8 II EF200mm f 1 8L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF28mm f 1 8 USM EF85mm f 1 2L USM EF200mm f 2L IS USM EF35mm f 1 4L USM EF85mm f 1 2L II USM EF200mm f 2L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF35mm f 2 EF85mm f 1 8 USM EF200mm f 2 8L USM EF35mm f 2 IS USM EF100mm f 2 USM EF200mm f 2 8L II USM EF50mm f 1 0L USM EF135mm f 2L USM EF300mm f 2 8L USM EF50mm f 1 2L USM EF135mm f 2L USM Extender EF1 4x EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM EF50mm f 1 4 USM EF135mm f 2 8 Softfocus EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM 79 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF400mm f 2 8L USM EF16 35mm f 2 8L USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM EF400mm f 2 8L II USM EF16 35mm f 2 8L II USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM EF17 35mm f 2 8L USM EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM EF20 35mm f 2 8L EF80 200mm f 2 8L TS E45mm f 2 8 EF24 70mm f 2 8L II USM TS E90mm f 2 8 EF28 70mm f 2 8L USM e With a TS E lens when focusing manually without tilt shift Group B Autofocusing with 61 points i
41. Same for both noise reduction AF point vertical horizontal Highlight tone priority Manual AF point Stops at AF Record function Standard selection pattern area edges File numbering AF point display _ Selected Auto cleaning VF display illumination Auto Dust Delete Data AF Microadjustment Disable The default settings are shown on pages 88 to 91 57 Before You Start Camera Settings Release shutter Enable without card MEA button All items selected display options button function Custom shooting modes Live View Shooting Settings Live View shooting AF mode Live mode Grid display Off Exposure simulation Silent LV shooting Metering timer 16 sec Movie Shooting Settings AF mode Grid display Movie recording size 1920x1080 IPB Sound recording Auto Metering timer Count wp Start time setting ove Unchanged recording count Moye Unchanged playback count START Movie shooting button G2 HDM output LCD No irora Silent LV shooting Drop frame Silent Control F For WFT and GPS settings refer to the respective device s instruction manual 58 Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level mm You can display a grid and electronic level in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor to help correct camera tilt Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder 1 Select VF grid display Under the 2 tab select VF grid display then press lt gt VF grid dis
42. Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear press lt amp 1 gt to append a lt v gt then select OK When monochrome is set If the Picture Style is set to Monochrome p 133 the warning icon will appear When WB is corrected If white balance correction p 142 is set the warning icon will appear When one touch image quality is set If you change the image recording quality with the one touch image quality function p 334 the warning icon will appear When ISO expansion is used If the ISO speed is set manually to L 50 H1 51200 or H2 102400 p 127 the warning icon will appear When spot metering is set If the metering mode is set to Spot metering p 170 the warning icon will appear LV shooting area display When the aspect ratio for Live View shooting is set to 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 p 206 you can set the display method for the shooting area L I Masked I Outlined ta Custom Function Settings Dial direction during Tv Av 7 Normal x Reverse direction The dial s turning direction for setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed In the lt M gt shooting mode the turning direction of the lt gt and lt 39 gt dial will be reversed In the other shooting modes the turning direction of only the lt gt dial will be reversed The lt gt dial s turning direction will be the same for the lt M gt mode and for setting the exposure compensation Whe
43. Servo AF mode the camera switches to One Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button Convenient when you need to keep switching between One Shot AF and Al Servo AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping 331 4 2 Custom Controls o Switch to registered AF point During metering when you press the button assigned to this function the camera will switch to the AF point registered on page 330 3 In step 3 on page 327 when you press the lt INFO gt button you can select Switch only when btn is held or Switch each time btn is pressed AF point direct selection During metering you can select an AF point directly with the lt 3 gt dial or lt gt without pressing the lt E gt button With the lt gt dial you can select a left or right AF point With Zone AF the selected zone will change in a loop 4 If you use lt gt and press the lt INFO gt button in step 3 on page 327 you can press lt gt straight down to select Switch to center AF point or Switch to registered AF point Metering start When you press the shutter button halfway only exposure metering is performed AE lock When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock during the metering Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting AE lock while button pr
44. Settings Deedee Del 1 22023 is ANE Bhom adL wHo S O B 514 48 After you press the lt INFO gt button a number of times the shooting settings will be displayed With the shooting settings displayed you can turn the Mode Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode p 343 Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings p 49 Press the lt INFO gt button again to turn off the display Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions mm You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor This is called the Quick Control screen Pes 1 Press the lt Q gt button O gt The Quick Control screen will appear 810 2 Set the desired function e Use lt gt to select a function The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to change the setting e P Tv Av M B modes OF AUTO MALALT ge me ES Ge Mo iL AEB setting mp Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed Fil In the lt 4J gt mode you can only select or set the recording function card image recording quality and drive mode 49 QJ Quick Control for Shooting Functions Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 Shutter speed p 164 Aperture p
45. Shooting information display 252 Shooting Mode 2 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 24 Av Aperture priority AE 166 B BUD ennonn 174 Custom shooting 338 M Manual exposure 168 P Program AE cceeeeeeee 162 Tv Shutter priority AE 164 G Scene Intelligent Auto 64 Shooting mode s settable FUNCIONS i e e aaas 352 Shooting orientation registration 103 Shooting settings display 48 343 Shutter button eisieiildoctea scared 44 Shutter synchronization 196 Shutter priority AE 164 221 Silent shooting Continuous shooting 114 Silent LV shooting 208 244 Single SHOOTING s s s 114 Single image display 00 250 Single shooting cesses 114 Single point AF sassen 72 75 Single point Spot AF 06 72 75 Slide SHOW eine see 271 Small Image recording quality 123 293 SOMWANG aerea aaa as 393 Speake f eee eee Men on ere ee 267 Spot AF point nasses 23 Spot meter ing cece 170 S RAW Small RAW 121 124 SIGE wes ar vensnnteu AT 160 Stopped down aperture 167 200 203 SUA cerano a EEE ERER ARE sect 27 System MAD ssesseessseeesrerrrerrreren 362 Temperature warning 217 247 Time code 239 241 Tone priority 3s scaly atest 148 Toning effect Monochrome 136 TOUGH padi eree 46 238 Tri
46. The shutter curtains and image sensor may then get damaged e Setting the power switch to lt OFF gt e Removing or inserting the battery e The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate Clean the sensor with care e Use a plain blower without any brush attached A brush can scratch the sensor e Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount If the power is cut off the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror may get damaged e Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor e Ifthe battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor the beeper will Sound as a warning Stop cleaning the sensor e f a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended 300 Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer e Printing p 304 You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images on the card The camera is compatible with A PictBridge which is the standard for direct printing e Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 311 DPOF Digital Print Order Format enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection quantity to print etc You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher e Transferring
47. The maximum burst is displayed on the bottom right in the viewfinder If the maximum burst for continuous shooting is 99 or higher 99 will be displayed For 3121119111112143 1SO ne 25 E oi alt UU W The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the camera Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture ir e If the viewfinder displays 99 for the maximum burst it means the maximum burst is 99 or higher If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower and the internal buffer memory becomes full buSY will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Shooting will then be disabled temporarily If you stop continuous shooting the maximum burst will increase After all the captured images are written to the card the maximum burst will be as listed on page 123 The maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder will not change even when you use a UDMA CF card However the maximum burst shown in parentheses on page 123 will apply 125 ISO Setting the ISO Speed memme Set the ISO speed image sensor s sensitivity to light to suit the ambient light level With the lt j gt mode selected the ISO speed will be set automatically p 127 Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting see pages 223 and 226 1 Press the lt S0O 4 gt button 46 2 Set the ISO speed While looking at the LCD panel or viewfinder turn the lt gt dial e ISO speed c
48. a MP o amp Select Print order Protect images e Under the L gt 1 tab select Print Rotate image Erase images order then press lt gt Print order Image copy RAW image processing Print order i 2 Select Set up C Standard 0 prints e Select Set up then press lt gt Date Off File No Off Sel lmage By All image Set up MENU fem RD 3 Set the option as desired Set the Print type Date and File No Select the option to be set then press lt 1 gt Select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Print type Date File No Print order Print order Print order Set up Print type b Standard iniex File No 311 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF Standard Prints one image on one sheet Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet Print type Both Prints both the standard and index prints On On imprints the recorded date on the print File number On imprints the file number on the print A Exit the setting e Press the lt MENU gt button gt The print order screen will reappear e Next select Sel Image By Mil or All image to order the images to be printed D e Even if Date and File No are set to On the date or file number may not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model e With Index prints both the Date and File No cannot be set to On at the same time
49. and Small About RAW A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital data It is recorded to the card as is and you can select the quality as follows G0 M GW or S EW A image can be processed with L gt 1 RAW image processing p 288 and saved as a JPEG image M and S images cannot be processed with the camera While the RAW image itself does not change you can process the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it With all RAW images you can use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 to make various adjustments and then generate a JPEG TIFF etc image incorporating those adjustments Fl Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images Using the provided software is recommended 124 M0 Setting the Image Recording Quality SS One touch Image Quality Setting With Custom Controls you can assign the image recording quality to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button so you can switch to it momentarily If you assign One touch image quality setting to the lt M Fn gt button or depth of field preview button you can quickly switch to the desired image recording quality and shoot For details see Custom Controls p 327 wD lf 1 Record func card folder sel is set to Rec separately you cannot switch to the One touch image quality setting Maximum Burst During Continuous Shooting
50. and shoot remotely with the computer connected to the camera Digital Photo Professional This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images You can view edit process and print RAW images at high speed You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images Picture Style Editor You can edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style files This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images ImageBrowser EX Connect to the Internet to download and install the software This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images You can easily view and play back still photos and MOV movies and also print JPEG images EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk is necessary for downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX OD Note that the software ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser provided with previous cameras does not support still photos and movie files shot with this camera not compatible Use ImageBrowser EX 394 Software Start Guide Installing the Software 4 e Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the software The software will not be installed correctly When downloading and installing ImageBrowser EX follow the steps below as with other EOS software included on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Note that Internet connection is necessary Downloading or installing software is not possible in environments with no Internet c
51. another picture until the merging is completed e In HDR mode the options dimmed in the camera menu cannot be set When you set HDR mode the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable It will revert to the original setting when you cancel the HDR mode E e f the image recording quality is set to RAW the HDR image will be recorded in L quality If the image recording quality is set to RAW JPEG the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set e You can also set HDR shooting with 3 HDR Mode 178 Multiple Exposures memme You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image If you shoot multiple exposure images with Live View shooting p 199 you can see how the single exposures merge while shooting 1 Press the lt E gt button Select multiple exposure e Turn the lt gt dial to select h then press lt 6 gt gt The multiple exposure setting screen will appear Multiple exposure 3 Set Multiple exposure wkd Ph pias ee Select On Func Ctrl or Sirini On ContShtng then press lt gt B To quit shooting multiple exposures select Disable On Func Ctrl Function and control priority Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while checking the result as you proceed During continuous shooting the continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly e On ContShtng Continuous shooting priority Geared for continuous multiple
52. automatically after the shooting ends e With Every shot HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable HDR HOR Mode 6 Set Auto Image Align e For handheld shooting select Enable When using a tripod select ee ae Disable Then press lt gt E Disable 7 Set the images to be saved e To save all three images and the HOR Mode merged HDR image select All images then press lt amp gt e To save only the HDR image select HDR img only then press lt gt Save source imgs All images HDR img only 8 Take the picture e HDR shooting is possible with viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting gt lt HDR gt will be displayed on the LCD panel When you press the shutter button completely three consecutive images will be captured and the HDR image will be recorded to the card 4 e HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion HDR shooting is possible within the range of ISO 100 25600 When shooting HDR images with Auto Image Align set to Enable AF point display information p 253 and Dust Delete data p 297 will not be appended to the image 177 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting a QD e Using a tripod is recommended For handheld shooting using a fast shutter speed is recommended e HDR shooting of a moving subject is not recommended because the movement of the subject will appear as afterimages in the merged image HDR shooting is suited f
53. be fixed at 3 2 e What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple exposures If all images are set to be saved the merged multiple exposure image file number will be the serial number coming after the file number of the final single exposure used to create the merged multiple exposure image e Will auto power off take effect during multiple exposure shooting As long as 2 Auto power off is not set to Disable the power will turn off automatically after 30 min of non operation If the auto power off takes effect multiple exposure shooting will end and multiple exposure settings will be canceled Before starting the multiple exposure shooting the auto power off will take effect as set with the camera and multiple exposure settings will be canceled 185 K7 Mirror LOCKUp mem Although using the self timer or Remote Switch can prevent camera shake using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations mirror shock can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups macro photography 1 Set Mirror lockup to Enable e Under the 481 tab select Mirror lockup then press lt gt e Select Enable then press lt gt 2 Focus the subject then press the shutter button completely gt The mirror will swing up and the lt A7 gt icon will blink on the LCD panel 3 Press the shutter button completely again gt The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down c In very bright l
54. before shooting a movie p 202 227 Note that the electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting The electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a movie 60 Feature Guide mau When MKJ Help is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen the Feature guide can be displayed The Feature guide is displayed while you hold down the lt INFO gt button If the Feature guide fills two or more screens a scroll bar will appear on the right edge To scroll hold down the lt INFO gt button and turn the lt 3 gt dial e Example AF 1 tab Case 2 or Ff r Case EEn E A AP contig toot Case 2 INFO Even if subjects briefly Continue to track subjects ae move from the AF points ignoring possible obstacles gt they will remain in focus Tracking sensitivity oo Accel decel tracking G o az 7 AF pt auto switching o es CR Help FE Detail set Effective when obstacles briefly come between the Camera and subject or with INFO Bot Scroll bar AF assist beam firing AF assist beam firing Enable INFO Enable Activate the Disable external flash AF assist IR AF assist beam only gt beam as needed Disable Deactivate the external flash AF assist beam to avoid disturbing Specify AF assist beam opera tion on an external Speedlite EEJ Help Example 2 tab Multi function lock Multi function lock Multi function lock lain Dial INFO S
55. can display the Live View image on a TV p 274 277 201 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor About the Information Display e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF mode Auto Lighting Optimizer AMIS Live mode Eye Fi card transmission status e FX Face detection Live meee AF point Live mode AFH Quick mode GPS connection indicator Shooting mode f Histogram Drive mode Ma White balance fwi Picture Style FEB Card for recording jira E EE Magnification playback D a dL T o Magnifying position Flash exposure 44115 et a A ER GPs Jaf FeBpAEB Eps Exposure er compensation Pa Reat Seen nSOmEea Z simulation Digital compass AE lock Battery check Flash ready er oer Image recording quality nighlight tone priority Shutter speed AEB HDR shooting ISO speed Multiple exposures Possible shots Aperture Exposure level F e The histogram can be displayed when Expo simulation Enable is set p 207 e You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 60 Note that if the AF mode is set to 4 Live mode or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable the electronic level cannot be displayed When lt EM gt is displayed in white it indicates that the Live View image brightness is close to what the captured image will look like if lt a gt is blinking it indicates that the Live View image is not bein
56. correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional provided software The higher the ISO speed the lower the correction amount will be 149 t Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction E Chromatic Aberration Correction Lens aberration correction EF24 105mm f AL IS USM Correction data available bEnable Chromatic aberration Disable MENU fw Select the setting Check that Correction data available is displayed for the attached lens e Turn the lt gt dial to select Chromatic aberration then press lt G1 gt Select Enable then press lt gt e If Correction data not available is displayed see About the Lens Correction Data on the next page 2 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with the chromatic aberration corrected QD If you play back a image shot with the chromatic aberration corrected the image will be displayed on the camera without the chromatic aberration correction applied Check the chromatic aberration correction with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 150 t Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction About the Lens Correction Data The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction data and chromatic aberration correction data for approx 25 lenses If you select Enable the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be
57. depend on the E Brightener Off i i EEAO ot selection made in step 4 PrintEffect CaNatural M e Brightness The image brightness can be adjusted e Adjust levels When you select Manual you can change E Adjust levels the histogram s distribution and adjust the image s brightness and contrast With the Adjust levels screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button to change the position of the lt f gt Turn the lt 3 gt dial to freely adjust the shadow level 0 127 or highlight level 128 255 e g Brightener Effective in backlit conditions that can make the subject s face look dark When On is set the face will be brightened for printing e Red eye corr Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye When On is set the red eye will be corrected for printing Fl e The g Brightener and Red eye corr effects will not show on the screen e When Detail set is selected you can adjust the Contrast Saturation Color tone and Color balance To adjust the Color balance use lt gt B is for blue A is amber M is magenta and G is green The color in the respective direction will be corrected e f you select Clear all all the printing effect settings will be reverted to their defaults 308 P Printing SS e Trimming the Image Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only the trimmed portion as if the image was recomposed Set the trimming right
58. displayed in one of three levels HG Green Battery s recharge performance is fine Hl Green Battery s recharge performance is slightly degraded HOO Red Purchasing anew battery is recommended 4 The use of a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N is recommended If you use any battery other than the Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N the camera s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result Fl e The shutter count is the number of still photos taken Movies are not counted e The battery information will also be displayed when a LP E6 LP E6N battery pack is in the Battery Grip BG E11 If you use size AA LR6 batteries only the battery level indicator will be displayed f for some reason communication with the battery is not possible or irregular Use this battery will be displayed If you select OK you can continue shooting However depending on the battery the battery info screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info correctly 344 ua Checking the Battery Information ee Registering the Battery to the Camera You can register up to six LP E6 LP E6N battery packs to the camera To register multiple battery packs to the camera do the procedure below for each battery pack 1 Press the lt INFO gt button e With the battery info screen displayed press the lt INFO gt button gt The battery history screen will appear Ifthe battery has not been registered it will be
59. drive stops This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to focus searching Fl Super telephoto lenses can become grossly out of focus during continuous focus search taking more time to achieve focus the next time Therefore setting Stop focus search is recommended for super telephoto lenses Selectable AF point You can change the number of manually selectable AF points In the case of automatic AF point selection all 61 AF points will remain active regardless of this setting Selectable AF point mi 61 points 61 points All 61 AF points will be manually a da ee selectable 9 paints ii Only cross type AF points Only cross type AF points will be MB Help manually selectable The number of selectable cross type AF points will differ depending on the lens 100 M9 Customizing AF Functions EE nni 15 points Fifteen major AF points will be manually selectable 1i 19 points Nine major AF points will be manually selectable WD With a lens from groups F to H p 83 85 the number of manually selectable AF points will be fewer E e Even with settings other than 61 points AF point expansion Manual selection a AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points and Zone AF manual selection of Zone are still possible D e When you press the lt E gt button the AF points that are not manually selectable will not be displayed Select AF area selection mode You can limit the se
60. folder with the folder number increased by one is created automatically Also if manual reset p 157 is executed a new folder will be created automatically Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created Creating Folders with a Personal Computer With the card open on the screen create a new folder named DCIM Open the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images The folder name must follow the format 100ABC_D The first three digits are the folder number from 100 to 999 The final five characters can be any combination of upper and lower case letters from A to Z numerals and the underscore _ The space cannot be used Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three digit folder number for example 100ABC_D and 100W_XYZ even if the other five characters in each name are different 153 7219 Changing the File Name me The file name has four alphanumeric characters followed by a four digit image number p 156 and extension The first four a Bese ae alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique to the camera However you can change them With User setting1 you can change and register the four characters as desired With User setting2 if you register three characters the fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate the image size Registering or Changing the File Name O Aa oeM
61. frame over the subject will make focusing easier 3 Focus the subject e Press the shutter button halfway and the lens focusing ring will rotate to focus gt During the autofocus operation lt a gt Will be displayed gt The AF point s that achieve s focus will be displayed At the same time the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light lt gt in the viewfinder will light up gt In low light the AF point s will light up briefly in red Focus confirmation light 64 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto Take the picture e Press the shutter button completely to take the picture gt The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD monitor E The lt 43 gt mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature outdoor and sunset scenes If you did not obtain the desired color tones change the shooting mode to lt P Tv Av M gt set a Picture Style other than lt E Al gt then shoot again gt FAQ e The focus confirmation light lt gt blinks and focus is not achieved Aim the center of the Area AF frame over a zone with good contrast then press the shutter button halfway p 44 If you are too close to the subject move away and try again If focus cannot be achieved the AF status indicator lt x gt will also blink e Multiple AF points light up simultaneously All those AF points have achieved focus As lo
62. ft 1 0 ft fill the viewfinder with a patternless solid white object and take a picture gt The picture will be taken in aperture priority AE mode at an aperture of f 22 Since the image will not be saved the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera Dust Delete Data gt When the picture is taken the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data Data obtained When the Dust Delete Data is obtained a message will appear Select OK and the menu will reappear e Ifthe data was not obtained successfully a message to that effect will appear Follow the Preparation procedure on the preceding page then select OK Take the picture again About the Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter Before an important shoot you should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again For details about using Digital Photo Professional provided software 0 394 to erase dust spots refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual p 396 The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly affects the image file size GD Be sure to use a solid white object such as a new sheet of white paper If the paper has any pattern or design it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software 298 mW Manual Sensor Cleaning mam Dust
63. grayed out Battery info 2 Select Register e Select Register then press lt gt gt The confirmation dialog will appear b Register A Battery info 3 Select OK Select OK then press lt gt gt The battery pack will be registered and the battery history screen will reappear gt The grayed out battery number will now be displayed in white letters e Press the lt MENU gt button The battery info screen will reappear Register new battery Info F e Battery registration is not possible if size AA LR6 batteries are in the B Battery Grip BG E11 or if you use the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 e f six battery packs have already been registered Register cannot be selected To delete unnecessary battery information see page 347 345 M0 Checking the Battery Information Sa el Labeling the Serial No on the Battery Affixing a serial number label onto all the registered Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N s makes it convenient Serial No 1 Write the serial number on a Battery info label Ce 7400300 drama 93 09 21 2011 e Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen ona commercially available label approx 25mm x 15 mm 1 0 in x 0 6 in in size Delete info lo Take out the battery and affix the 2 label e Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Open the battery compartment cover and remove the battery e Affix the label as shown side with no ele
64. grouping 86 MEW Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject m You can easily fine tune Al Servo AF to suit a particular subject or scene just by selecting between case 1 to case 6 This feature is called the AF Configuration Tool o Wa p Q 4 1 Select the AF 1 tab 01 AF config foo Case 1 Versatile multi purpose S elect a case aE setting t Taag say e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select a case Accel decel tracking amp re icon then press lt gt of AF pt auto switching d UkHelip GAE Detail set The selected case will be set The ii selected case is indicated in blue About Case 1 to 6 As explained on pages 92 to 94 case 1 to 6 are six setting combinations of subject tracking sensitivity acceleration deceleration tracking and AF point auto switching Refer to the table below to select the case applicable to the subject or scene Case Icon Description Applicable Subjects Page Case 1 A ueralls MUNE PURPOSE For any moving subject 88 setting Continue to track the Tennis players butterfly Case 2 K subject ignoring possible swimmers freestyle skiers 88 obstacles etc Instantly focus on subjects Starting line of a bicycle Case 3 IX suddenly entering AF race alpine downhill skiers 89 points etc ased Q For subjects that accelerate Soccer motor sports 89 or decelerate quickly basketball etc Case 5 Y ror te Supis ne Figure skaters
65. gt to the left or right to see the previous or next frames Holding it down will fast forward the frames Turn the lt 3 gt dial for frame by frame playback e After deciding which part to edit out press lt gt The portion highlighted in blue on the top of the screen is what will remain 100 0017 i 3 Check the edited movie r Select gt and press lt gt to play back the portion highlighted in blue To change the editing go back to step 2 To cancel the editing select gt and press lt amp 1 gt 269 X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes 100 0017 Li A Save the movie e Select then press lt gt gt The save screen will appear To save it as anew movie select New file To save it and overwrite the original movie file select Overwrite Then press lt gt On the confirmation screen select OK then press lt gt to save the edited movie and return to the movie playback screen 4 Since the editing is performed in 1 sec increments position indicated by X the exact position where the movie is edited may differ slightly from the position you specified e Ifthe card does not have enough free space New file will not be available 2 0 72319 Slide Show Auto Playback mu You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show a Resize Rating Slide show Image transfer Image jump wii 1 Select Slide sho
66. lock einsodx 1 mi i Set ISO speed hold button turn Set ISO speed during metering Shutter speed setting in M mode RAW JPEG Aperture setting in M mode One touch image quality setting RAW JPEG H One touch image quality hold abew Image quality Picture Style Depth of field preview IS start VF electronic level 333 334 335 O O Menu display uoljesedO Image playback Magnify Reduce press SET turn 328 No function disabled 336 MFN amp O O O O 2 O 2 O O O 3 O 3 O on O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O s5 Cs O s Ors O O O O O O O O O O O O O The AF stop button MB is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses 4 2 Custom Controls 329 4 2 Custom Controls iss SF Metering and AF start When you press the button assigned to this function metering and AF are executed 1 If you assign the Metering and AF start function to the lt AF ON gt and lt gt buttons and add the function to switch to the registered AF point you can instantly switch to the registered AF point To enable this function press the lt INFO gt button in step 3 on page 327 On the AF start point selection screen select Registered AF point e R
67. lt OFF gt the AEB and white balance bracketing settings will be canceled AEB will also be canceled when the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting OFF Disable The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to lt OFF gt If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting AEB will be canceled temporarily but the AEB range will be retained 321 ta Custom Function Settings Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed 0 0 0 0 0 0 White Balance Bracketing B A Direction M G Direction 0 Standard exposure 0 Standard white balance 0 Standard white balance Decreased exposure Blue bias Magenta bias Increased exposure Amber bias Green bias Number of bracketed shots The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be changed from the usual 3 shots to 2 5 or 7 shots When Bracketing sequence 0 is set the bracketed shots will be taken as shown in the table below 3 3 shots 2 2 shots 5 5 shots 7 7 shots 1 stop increments E ISS E E EEEE EE Standard 3 3 shots Standard 2 2 shots Standard 5 5 shots Standard 7 7 shots 0 Fl If 2 shots is set you can select the or side when setting the AEB range 322 ta Custom Function Settings a OFF
68. not transferred all the images on the card not yet transferred to a personal computer will be selected For a description of Card images failed transfer and Clear card s transf history see Sel AE above QD e f any screen other than EOS Utility s main window is displayed on the personal computer Direct transfer is not displayed e During the image transfer certain menu options cannot be used Fl e You can also transfer movies e Up to 9 999 images can be transferred in one batch Shooting is possible during the image transfer 318 13 Customizing the Camera You can customize various camera features to suit your picture taking preferences with Custom Functions Also the current camera settings can be saved under the Mode Dial s lt W gt lt gt and lt gt positions The features explained in this chapter can be set and a in the following shooting modes P Tv Av M mm Custom Functions me Ca LV Movie 4 1 Exposure Shooting Shooting Exposure level increments O O ISO speed setting increments p 321 O In M Bracketing auto cancel O Still photo with WB Bracketing sequence O p 322 bracketing Number of bracketed shots O set Safety shift p 323 O 4 2 Display Operation Warnings in viewfinder p 324 LV shooting area display O Dial direction during Tv
69. o 1 Select File name EET SET UFI Record func card folder sel e Under the 1 tab select File File numbering Continuous name then press lt gt File name File name 2 Select Change User setting File name BE3B Turn the lt gt dial to select Change Change User setting i Change Ening User setting then press lt amp gt File name 3 Enter any alphanumeric ye characters alim For User setting1 enter four characters For User setting2 enter three characters e Press the lt T gt button to delete any EA Cancel unnecessary characters e Press the lt Q gt button and the text palette will be highlighted in a color frame Text can be entered TRETT Operate the lt 3 gt dial or lt gt 4 4 to move the and select the desired we ng character Then press lt gt to enter it um Changing the File Name SS a ee Exit the setting e Enter the required number of alphanumeric characters then press the lt MENU gt button gt The new file name will be registered and the screen in step 2 will reappear File name 5 Select the registered file name Filename __ BE3B e Turn the lt gt dial to select File ENE ici name Sie name then press lt 6 gt Preset code BE3B e Turn the lt gt dial to select the user setingl DM3 registered file name then press User setting IMG image size MERC ge lt G1 gt e f User setting2 has been register
70. one provided e If there is a long beeping sound in step 5 it indicates a problem with the printer Resolve the problem displayed by the error message p 310 e Printing is not possible in the HDR mode g e You can also print RAW images taken with this camera e f you use a battery pack to power the camera make sure it is fully charged With a fully charged battery printing up to approx 4 hours is possible e Before disconnecting the cable first turn off the camera and printer Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable e For direct printing using AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately to power the camera is recommended 303 fC Printing mm The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer Some settings may not be available For details refer to the printer s instruction manual Primer eofnegicd icon 1 Select the image to be printed Check that the lt A gt icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD oe E monitor AU i es 2S Off e Turn the lt gt dial to select the ieee image to be printed 1P Borderless 2 Press lt gt The print settings screen will appear Print setting screen yr FaDefault a Off or off Uh 1 copies Sets the quantity to be printed Trimming Sets the trimming cropping p 309 2 9x13cm Paper settings Sets the paper size type and layout E Photo Cancel Returns to the screen in step 1 E Borderless
71. out e With the SD card s label facing you push in the card until it clicks in place Write protect switch 31 Installing and Removing the Card Close the cover Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut gt When you set the power switch to lt ON gt p 34 the number of possible shots and the loaded card s will be displayed on the LCD panel The images will be recorded to the card with the lt gt icon next to the respective card s indicator CF card indicator SD card indicator 32 The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk cards Although the camera does not comply with the UHS Ultra High Speed speed class standard UHS SDHC SDXC cards can be used SDHC SDXC memory cards can be used with the camera S Ultra DMA UDMA CF cards can also be used with the XC camera UDMA CF cards enable faster data writing The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card image recording quality ISO speed etc Setting t491 Release shutter without card to Disable will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card p 354 Installing and Removing the Card Removing the Card 1 Open the cover Set the power switch to lt OFF gt Make sure the access lamp is off then open the cover e f Recording is displayed close the cover 2 Remove the card e To
72. pack unplug the charger s power plug from the power outlet Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger Wait 2 to 3 minutes then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet If the problem persists contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center The charger s lamp does not blink If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is high the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons lamp off During the charging if the battery s temperature becomes high for any reason the charging will stop automatically lamp blinks When the battery temperature goes down the charging will resume automatically The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to lt ON gt 364 The battery is not properly installed in the camera p 30 Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed p 30 Make sure the card slot cover is closed p 31 Recharge the battery p 28 Troubleshooting Guide a A nn The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to lt OFF gt e Ifthe power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card the access lamp will remain on continue to blink for a few seconds When the image recording is completed the power will turn off automatically The battery becomes exhausted quickly e Use a fully charged battery pack p 28 e The battery performance may have degraded See 3 Battery info to check the battery
73. personal computer For the procedure to install the provided software see page 395 Preparation for Image Transfer 4 Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt te 2 Connect the camera to a personal computer e Use the interface cable provided with the camera Connect the cable to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt gt icon facing the front of the camera Connect the cord s plug to the personal computer s USB terminal 315 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer 3 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt When the personal computer displays a screen to select the program select EOS Utility gt The EOS Utility screen will appear on the personal computer QD After the EOS Utility screen appears do not operate EOS Utility If any screen other than EOS Utility s main window is displayed Direct transfer in step 5 on page 318 will not be displayed The image transfer function will not be available F e f the EOS Utility screen does not appear refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 396 e Before disconnecting the cable turn off the camera Hold the plug not the cord to pull out the cable uam Transferring RAW JPEG Images Image transfer RAW IPEG transfer JPEG only RAW only RAW JPEG 316 For RAW JPEG images you can specify which image to transfer On the next
74. points p 74 e The AF point at the registered area is blinking p 330 cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot Set the AF mode to One Shot AF Focus lock is not possible in the Al Servo AF and Al Focus AF modes p 70 The continuous shooting speed is slow e Depending on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness etc the continuous shooting soeed may become slower The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower e f you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the number mentioned on page 123 ISO 100 cannot be set ISO speed expansion cannot be selected If 3 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 25600 or up to 12800 for movie shooting Even if you expand the settable ISO speed range in ISO speed range you cannot set expanded ISO speeds L H H1 H2 a When 483 Highlight tone priority is set to Disable ISO 100 125 160 can be set p 148 367 Troubleshooting Guide The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set If t 83 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set When 493 Highlight tone priority is set to Disable then the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set p 148 Even though I set a decreased exposure compensation the image comes out bright Set 42 A
75. press Print onder lt CE gt mange cony gt images will be displayed RAW image processing Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image you want to process e If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from the index display _ 2 Select an image A Sores Sivie 3 Process the image i Press lt gt and the RAW processing options will appear p 290 292 e Use lt gt to select an option then e turn the lt gt dial to set it nro Reset gt The displayed image will reflect Brightness adjustment White balance and the other setting adjustments e To return to the image settings at the time of shooting press the lt INFO gt button __ Shot settings 288 RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera a ARCADE Displaying the setting screen E ir SE E L A EN a a a Press lt gt to display the setting screen Turn the lt 3 gt or lt gt dial to change the setting To return to the screen in step 3 press lt amp gt A Save the image e Select 2 Save then press lt amp gt Select OK to save the image Check the destination folder and SE Magnify S Setin image file number then select OK fese e To process another image repeat a steps 2 to 4 Save as new file Cancel OK e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu About the Magnified View You can mag
76. s 1 button to select an option Play movie then press the Enter button Slide show f you select Return and press the Enter INFO Disp shooting info button the menu will disappear and you can Rotate use the gt button to select an image QD During the two image display p 259 playback with the TV s remote control is not possible To use the TV s remote control for playback first press the lt M D gt button to return to the single image display Fl Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection For details refer to the TV set s instruction manual e Certain TV sets even those compatible with HDMI CEC may not operate properly In such a case set L gt 3 Ctrl over HDMI to Disable and use the camera to control the playback operation 2 6 Viewing the Images on TV Viewing on Non High Definition HD TV Sets 1 Connect the provided AV cable to the camera e With the plug s lt Canon gt logo facing the back of the camera insert it into the lt A V OUT gt terminal 2 Connect the AV cable to the TV set e Connect the AV cable to the TV s video IN terminal and audio IN terminal 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV s video input to select the connected port A Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt JUE 5 Press the lt L gt gt button He gt The image will appear on the TV ry om screen Nothing will be dis
77. s file name e f Sel lImage is set you cannot copy images in multiple folders at one time Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder f animage is being copied to a target folder card which has an image with the same file number the following will be displayed Skip image and continue Replace existing image Cancel copy Select the copying method then press lt 6 gt e Skip image and continue Any images in the source folder having the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and not copied e Replace existing image Any images in the target folder having the same file number as the source images including protected images will be overwritten If an image with a print order p 311 is overwritten you will have to set the print order again e The image s print order information and image transfer information will not be retained when the image is copied Shooting is not possible during the copying operation Select Cancel before shooting 282 T Erasing Images mau You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in one batch Protected images p 278 will not be erased q Once an image is erased it cannot be recovered Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it To prevent important images from being erased accidentally protect them Erasing a RAW JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images Erasing a Single Image 1 Pla
78. scious iwesetsunsavasvaacsacatecudusyeeredtvatelninuacadetuauteties 337 Register Custom Shooting Modes cccccccsceseeseeseeeseeeseees 338 14 Reference 341 INFO Button FUNCHON Se ayice tarot ors aegietandseinsdaueeetonteaton 342 Checking the Battery Information cccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 344 Using a Household Power Outlet ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaes 348 Replacing the Date Time Battery ce ceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 349 Using Eye Fi Cards ercon daveveedeeiwardwwanda nia ldoueten 350 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode 352 M nu Settings T 354 SY SIEM Mapa ani ar E 362 Troubleshooting Guide nssnsssnenneneeneneeeseeeeeernenrnrnrrnnnnrnnnnn nnn 364 Enor Gods S eaae a a a REEE 377 operccaon S enna ese 378 Dalely Precau tions srera a a aat 389 15 Software Start Guide 393 Software Start Guida iasi ea aaia aaaeaii ie 394 NAEX a a a a a a a A 397 11 Index to Features memm Power AF e Charging the battery gt p 28 e AF mode gt p 70 e Battery check gt p 35 e AF area selection mode p 72 e Battery information check gt p 344 e AF point selection gt p 74 e Power outlet gt p 348 e Al Servo AF characteristics gt p 87 e Auto power off gt p 55 e AF Custom Functions gt p 96 e AF Microadjustment gt p 106 Card Manual focusing gt p 113 e Format gt p 53 Metering Select card gt p 118 e Release shutter without card
79. sereen 52 DOMINGOS iss austen eeaeee 354 MENU Eo o p re 4 Metering Mode seseeesssssssereee ene 169 Metering timer 208 244 MF Manual focusing 113 216 E il aE ore A eer eee rer Pree 73 329 Microadjustment eee 106 Microphone nsss 220 237 Mirror lockup nui ectccth tected sadcce susan 186 Mode Dial 24 45 Monochrome imag 133 136 Movie sarc cateich ctonsect ietieantdtuaesunsdaaaenns 219 PAESIOGK oaa a 224 AF MOde ciiir dima 232 243 Aperture priority AE 222 Autoexposure shooting 220 Compression method 233 COUN ineeie iniia 240 Drop frame cccecceeeeeceeeeceeeeeees 242 o E A 269 Editing out first and last scenes eneee 269 EMO MG sidecssccztersataeiaeeccccesieeds 265 External microphone 237 FIG Si eta 234 Frame rate caccscceecssssseeeecerseeereees 233 Grid display nseeaeeeaeeeaeeeee een 243 Headphones eceeeeees 237 Information display 2 0 227 Manual exposure shooting 225 Metering timer eee 244 Microphone sses 220 237 Movie recording size 233 Movie shooting button 244 PUY ACK ce scons dee ellen net 267 Quick Control ivaitencessssieneencs 232 Recording command 241 Recording time ee 234 Shutter priority AE 00 221 Silent control sssseeseeeeeees 238 Silent shooting s 244
80. setting will switch to 1 ISO 100 or 2 H 25600 respectively during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting 370 Troubleshooting Guide The exposure changes during movie shooting e If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting the changes in the exposure may be recorded Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result The subject looks distorted during movie shooting e If you move the camera to the left or right quickly high speed panning or shoot a moving subject the image may look distorted The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting e Flickering horizontal stripes noise or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light LED bulbs or other light sources during movie shooting Also changes in the exposure brightness or color tone may also be recorded In the lt M gt mode a slow shutter speed may solve the problem When shoot still photos during movie shooting the movie shooting stops e To shoot still photos during movie shooting using a CF card compatible with UDMA transfer rates is recommended Setting a lower image quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos can also resolve th
81. that rating Taking advantage of ratings With gt 2 Image jump w you can display only rated images and movies e With P 2 Slide show you can play back only rated images and movies e With Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 you can select only rated images and movies e With Windows 8 1 Windows 8 or Windows 7 etc you can see each file s rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image viewer 262 Q Quick Control During Playback ma During playback you can press the lt Q gt button to set the following Protect images Rotate image Rating RW RAW image processing RAW images only 54 Resize JPEG image only Si Highlight alert 3 AF point display 4 Image jump w For movies only the functions in bold above can be set Press the lt Q gt button e During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt The Quick Control screen will appear Protect images Disable 2 Select a function and set it Tilt lt lt gt up or down to select a function gma Ss oS gt The setting of the selected function is ne ai displayed at the bottom w amp e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to set the function e For RAW image processing and Resize press lt gt and set the function For details see page 288 for RAW image processing and page 293 for Resize To cancel press the lt MENU gt button 3 Exit the setting e Press th
82. the face detection Live mode Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture the lt gt will be grayed out Then if you press the shutter button halfway the center AF point lt LI gt will be used to focus 211 Using AF to Focus Xa Live Mode and x Face Detection Live Mode Notes AF operation Focusing will take slightly longer Even when focus has been achieved pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult If this happens stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source If you press the lt Q gt button in the Live mode the image will be magnified at the AF point If focusing is difficult in the magnified view return to the normal view and autofocus Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views If you autofocus in the Live mode s normal view and then magnify the image the focus may no longer be correct In the X Live mode pressing the lt Q gt button will not magnify the image F e Inthe Live mode or amp face detection Live mode if you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly out of focus aim the center AF point over the subject to focus then take the picture e The external Speedlite will not emit the AF assist bea
83. the lt gt dial clockwise e To select other images to be copied repeat step 4 5 Press the lt RATE gt button e After selecting all the images to be copied press the lt RATE gt button Target 6 Select OK Check the target card and press Copy to Cardz Select lt E gt target folder to copy to OK MENU fkm FaTarget folder 7 7 Select the target folder 100E0S550 mcr e Turnthe lt gt dial to select the folder to copy the images to then press lt gt To create a new folder select Create folder Ei JS UEUS Create folder 281 Copying Images SSS SSS Falmage copy 8 Select OK Source i 100E0550 Check the copy source and target 3images 13 7 MB ros Bieri 1O1EDSSD card s information Freespace 7 72 G8 e Turn the lt gt dial to select OK Copy images then press lt gt Cancel OK Filmage copy gt The copying will start and the progress will be displayed When the copying is completed the Images to copy i Copied images result will be displayed Images not copied Select OK to return to the screen in O step 2 Finished copying tM Copying All Images in a Folder or Card You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at one time Under L gt 1 Image copy when you select Sel fil or All image you can copy all the images in the folder or on a card in The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source image
84. the camera mounted on a tripod This prevents camera shake while you shoot still lifes or bulb exposures e After taking self timer shots playing back the image p 250 to check focus and exposure is recommended e When using the self timer to shoot only yourself use focus lock p 67 on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand To cancel the self timer after it starts press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 116 Image Settings This chapter explains image related function settings Image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style white balance Auto Lighting Optimizer lens peripheral illumination correction chromatic aberration correction and other functions e A gt icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt 3 gt mode M Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ma If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted you can start shooting When only one card is inserted the procedures described on pages 118 to 120 are not necessary If you insert both a CF card and SD card you can select the recording method and select which card to use for recording and playing back images Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted O a o Mo x 1 Select Record func card folder fanaa S27 LAF Record func card folder sel J sel eA Dees Coma e Under the 1 tab s
85. the right Multi function lock p 47 45 Basic Operation 3 Quick Control Dial 1 After pressing a button turn the lt gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt ISO gt the respective function remains selected for 6 seconds 6 During this time you can turn the lt gt gt dial to set the desired setting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot e Use this dial to select or set the white balance drive mode flash exposure compensation AF point etc 2 Turn the lt 32 gt dial only While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt 3 gt dial to set the desired setting e Use this dial to set the exposure compensation amount the aperture setting for manual exposures etc 1on _4 Fl The operations in 1 are also possible while the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right Multi function lock p 47 Touch Pad During movie shooting the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the shutter speed aperture ISO speed exposure compensation sound recording level and headphone volume p 238 This function works when 5 Silent Control is set to Enable After pressing the lt Q gt button tap the lt gt dial s inner ring at the top bottom left or right 46 Bas
86. to focus subjects 112 213 AEE T AAEE EEA T 85 Manual focusing 113 216 Out of focus 42 43 112 213 Recompose scncewcemiinueaa 67 AF area selection mode 72 75 AF Configuration Tool 05 87 AF point expansion 0 12 79 AF ON AF start button 44 Al FOCUS Al Focus AF 71 Al SERVO AI Servo AP 71 Accel decel tracking 4 93 AF pt auto switching 94 Tracking sensitivity 92 PAs SOIVOcA EF vomusedacantoncastieseteerd 67 71 ALL I CPONIW eicscscesccattidesveeocecncee 233 Ambient light Sensor 20 Aperture priority AE 166 222 Area AF frame acn 23 72 77 PSDOCI TAO a2 toed eea 206 Audio video OUT 0 265 274 Auto Lighting Optimizer 63 144 Auto playback 271 Auto power Off eeee 34 55 Auto reset ccttececdsssnacddddeneeszannanessses 157 Auto rotate of vertical images 286 Auto switch Card 119 Autofocus gt AF Automatic selection AF 73 77 Automatic selection of AF POM Teia a 73 77 Av Aperture priority AE 166 222 AN OUT in 265 277 ey Bi BUD eeii 174 220 B N oe aaan a aa an 133 136 Battery tal vecssackanntoncncgnentrnves 28 30 35 Battery Grip sa cscpe elias 35 362 Beeper neninn 354 Black and white image 133 136 Bracketing csclsssssarevanusacteeny 143 172
87. transferred to a personal computer you can use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 to easily crop the image to the aspect ratio that was set OFF Off 6 7 Aspect ratio 6 7 6 6 Aspect ratio 6 6 5 6 Aspect ratio 10 12 3 4 Aspect ratio 3 4 5 7 Aspect ratio 5 7 4 5 Aspect ratio 4 5 4 e If 4 Aspect ratio is not set to 3 2 you cannot add cropping information to the image e f cropping information has been added to a image the image cannot be cropped with the camera s RAW image processing Default Erase option During image playback and image review after image capture when you press the lt j gt button the erase menu appears p 283 You can set which option Cancel or Erase is to be preselected on this screen If Erase is set you can just press lt gt to quickly erase the image Ts Cancel selected ti Erase selected QD If Erase is set be careful not to erase an image accidentally 2 Custom Controls ma You can assign frequently used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences O 4 y BBM x 1 Select 4 2 Custom Controls Warnings in n E e Under the 2 2 tab select Custom EE EEE y Controls then press lt gt Multi function lock gt The Custom Controls screen will Custom Controls _ appear Custom Controls 2 Select a camera button or dial Shutter butt half press utter Turn the lt 32 gt dial to select a but
88. upper left of the screen No mark Not selected v Selected for transfer X Transfer failed O Transfer succeeded e On page 316 the procedures for RAW JPEG transfer and steps 1 to 4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a personal computer 317 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer Image sel transter v Images to transfer Images failed trans Images transferred Sel image Sel Direct transfer e Sel i 7 0 0 All image MENL a 5 Transfer the image On the computer screen check that EOS Utility s main window is displayed Select Direct transfer then press lt G7 gt On the confirmation screen select OK and the images will be transferred to the personal computer Images selected with Sel fl and All image can also be transferred in this way Select Sel fl and select Folder images not transfer d When you select a folder all the images in that folder not yet transferred to the personal computer will be selected Selecting Folder images failed transf will select the selected folder s images that failed to transfer Selecting Clear folder transf history will clear the transfer history of the images in the selected folder After clearing the transfer history you can select Folder images not transfer d and again transfer all the images in the folder e All image If All image is selected and you select Card images
89. used to focus This mode is set automatically in the lt j gt mode With One Shot AF pressing the shutter button A halfway will display the AF point s lt L gt that C achieved focus If multiple AF points are displayed it means they all have achieved focus This mode tends to focus the nearest subject With Al Servo AF the manually selected p 74 AF 22 gt point lt gt is used first to achieve focus The AF i eea i point s achieving focus is displayed as lt _ gt o ao o o o o o o o o o o Q e With 61 point automatic selection AF or Zone AF the active AF point lt L gt will keep switching to track the subject in Al Servo AF mode However under certain shooting conditions such as when the subject is small it may not be able to track the subject Also in low temperatures the tracking response is slower e With Single point Spot AF focusing with the Speedlite s AF assist beam may be difficult e If you are using a peripheral AF point or a wide angle lens achieving focus with the EOS dedicated Speedlite s AF assist beam may be difficult In such a case select an AF point close to the center When the AF point s light up part or all of the viewfinder may light up in red This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal e In low temperatures the AF point s blinking p 74 may be difficult to see This is a characteristic of AF point display using liquid crystal E e
90. will appear on the LCD panel F lt D gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when Monochrome is set p 324 User Def 1 3 You can register a basic style such as Portrait Landscape a Picture Style file etc and adjust it as desired p 137 Any User Defined Picture Style that has not been set will have the same settings as the Standard Picture Style About the Symbols The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast The numerals indicate the parameter settings such as for Sharpness and Contrast for each Picture Style Picture Style 0IL Picture Style PRES randard Symbols eoniast e Sman Filter effect Monochrome Toning effect Monochrome 133 313 Customizing a Picture Style mau You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters such as Sharpness and Contrast To see the resulting effects take test shots To customize Monochrome see page 136 1 Press the lt C gt button Select 342 Turn the lt gt dial to select 42 gt then press lt gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Picture Style 3 Select a Picture Style Portrait e Turn the lt gt dial to select the me a desired Picture Style then press GSA aS SSP Bac Bac lt INFO gt Ge Gl Gel Gea Ge INFO Detail set Detail set EaP Portrait Select a parameter OSharpne
91. with your fingers If you want to zoom do it before focusing Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus slightly While pressing the lens release button turn the lens as shown by the arrow e Turn the lens until it stops then detach it e Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens 40 Attaching and Detaching a Lens Attaching a Lens Hood When the dedicated EW 83H hood is attached to the EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens it blocks stray light and protects the front of the lens from snow rain dust etc Before storing the lens in a bag etc you can attach the hood in reverse A 1 Align the red dots on the hood and lens edges i 2 Turn the hood as shown in the illustration e Turn the lens hood clockwise until it attaches securely QW e Ifthe hood is not properly attached it may obstruct the image s periphery making it look dark When attaching or detaching the lens hood grasp the base of the hood when turning it Grasping the hood s edges when turning it may deform the hood 41 About the Lens Image Stabilizer mum When you use the IS lens built in Image Stabilizer camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot The procedure explained here is based on the EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens as an example IS stands for Image Stabilizer Set the IS switch to lt ON gt e Also set the camera s power switch to
92. x 1920 Recording function Standard Auto switch card Rec separately Rec to multiple Create select a folder Possible File name Preset code User setting 1 User setting 2 File numbering Continuous auto reset manual reset e Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style Auto Standard Portrait Landscape Neutral Faithful Monochrome User Def 1 3 White balance Auto Preset Daylight Shade Cloudy Tungsten light White fluorescent light Flash Custom Color temperature setting Approx 2500 10000K White balance correction and White balance bracketing possible Flash color temperature information transmission enabled 378 Specifications Noise reduction Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots Automatic image brightness correction Auto Lighting Optimizer Highlight tone priority Provided Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction e Viewfinder Type Eye level pentaprism Coverage Vertical Horizontal approx 100 with Eye point approx 21 mm Magnification Approx 0 71x 1 m with 50 mm lens at infinity Eye point Approx 21 mm from eyepiece lens center at 1 m Built in dioptric adjustment Approx 3 0 1 0 m dpt Focusing screen Fixed AF status indicator Provided Grid display Provided Electronic level Horizontal 1 increments 6 Vertical 1 increments 4 During horizontal shooting Mirror Quick return ty
93. you turn the lt 7 gt dial counterclockwise Turning the dial further will display the index display p 255 2 Scroll around the image e Use lt gt to scroll around the magnified image e To exit the magnified view press the lt Q gt button or lt L gt gt button and the single image display will return Fl In magnified view you can turn the lt 3 gt dial to view another image at the same magnification The image can be magnified also during the image review immediately after shooting e A movie cannot be magnified 25 Q Magnified View uam Magnification Settings Magnificatn apx Under the gt 13 tab when you select 1x no magnification Magnificatn apx you can set the 2x magnify from center starting magnification and initial position sterner nl for the magnified view Bx magnify from center 10x magnify from center Actual size from selected pt Same as last magnif from ctr e 1x no magnification The image will not be magnified The magnified view will start with the single image display 2x 4x 8x 10x magnify from center The magnified view will start at the image center at the selected magnification e Actual size from selected point The recorded image s pixels will be displayed at approx 100 The magnified view will start at the AF point that achieved focus If the photo was taken with manual focus the magnified view will start at the image center
94. 0 f Fa pe 7 I 4 sams e a kee ee a Epam a ir gt a ia I Ran ay dite oe eee e eee aa p ea ee ee a a a ee a E qi Sah he Meee NE i Se ie ap OP ag a E iera ia sA a iL its a gone p i irr Ere i IAO Da i T te ee With a low aperture f number f 5 6 With a high aperture f number f 32 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt 2 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt g gt dial Focus the subject e Press the shutter button halfway The shutter speed is set automatically A Check the viewfinder display and shoot As long as the shutter speed is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained I 166 Av Aperture Priority AE e Ifthe 30 shutter speed blinks it indicates underexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a larger aperture lower f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed e f the 8000 shutter speed blinks it indicates overexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a smaller aperture higher aperture f number until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed Fl Aperture Display The higher the f number the smaller the aperture opening will be The apertures displayed will differ depending on the lens If no lens is attached to the camera 00 will be displayed for the aperture Depth of Fi
95. 1 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF Manual selection and Single point AF Manual selection modes F If the subject moves erratically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 94 90 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SS SS SS See Case 6 For subjects that change speed and move erratically o Mo Q Geared for tracking moving subjects E ae o whose speed can change dramatically k For subjects that change and suddenly Also if the target subject E E e moves dramatically up down left or right Tracking sensitivity es o Bad oie Accel decel tracking a a n and it is difficult to focus the AF point Y AF ptauto switching e i a Siete N Detal sat switches automatically to track the subject Default settings This setting takes effect when the e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 1 following AF area selection modes are L set AF point expansion Manual selection a AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 61 point automatic selection AF This setting is not available with the Single point Spot AF Manual selection and Single point AF Manual selection modes Fil e Ifthe moving subject suddenly and greatly changes speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give b
96. 166 AE lock p 173 Highlight tone priority p 148 Shooting mode p 24 S E APL same 5600 ISO speed p 126 Expos compensation Std La an Ba ih a AEB setti 171 172 7a setting p IS w Custom Controls p 327 fe Hdg Po ML Picture Style p 131 jpsmppa S GH e aL Image recording quality AF mode p 70 err A 0 121 Recording function Card selection p 118 Flash exposure compensation p 190 Drive mode p 114 White balance p 139 Metering mode p 169 White balance correction p 142 E Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Quick Control screen Function Setting Screen Select the desired function and press mii lt 1 gt The function s setting screen Seeded Be leedeed 0 Bz will appear mD ve Bhom dL Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to ws E O B change the setting There are also functions that are set by pressing the lt INFO gt button e Press lt amp gt to finalize the setting and return to the Quick Control screen Ga When you select lt g gt Custom Fe Pea es per Controls p 327 and press the lt MENU gt button the shooting settings display will reappear Tv 1 125 E AUTO Flash exposure comp Flash exposure comp 50 729 Menu Operations sx With menus you can set various functions such as the image recording quality date time etc While looking at the LCD monitor use the lt MENU gt and lt Q gt bu
97. 2 Gray Not connected No connection with access point Blinking Connecting Connection with access point Displayed Connected Connection to access point established t Transferring Image transfer to access point in progress Transmission status icon Ww Cautions for Using Eye Fi Cards If is displayed an error occurred while retrieving the card information Turn the camera s power switch off and on again e Even if Eye Fi trans is set to Disable it may still transmit a signal In hospitals airports and other places where wireless transmissions are prohibited remove the Eye Fi card from the camera e Ifthe image transfer does not function check the Eye Fi card and personal computer settings For details refer to the card s instruction manual e Depending on the wireless LAN s connection conditions the image transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted e Because of the transmission function the Eye Fi card may become hot The battery power will be consumed faster e During the image transfer auto power off will not take effect 351 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode mum Set automatically O User selectable __ Not selectable Disabled ERIR Still Photos Movies P Tv Avi M B Ay All image quality settings selectable O Wee S
98. 323 ia then press lt 6 gt The Picture Style selection screen will appear Picture Style Select User Def User Def 1 Standard e Turn the lt gt dial to select User i Def then press lt INFO gt a BSP Detail set msi User Def 1 A Press lt GED gt Picture Style standard e With Picture Style selected press Sharpness l Contrast lt Ger gt amp Saturation Color tone Detail set B T User Def 1 5 Select the base Picture Style Picture Style Landscape e Turn the lt gt dial to select the base Picture Style then press lt G7 gt e To adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility provided software select the Picture Style here 137 31 Registering a Picture Style Detail set Ezi User Def 1 Select a parameter Picture Style Landscape e Turn the lt gt dial to select a Sharpness Contrast parameter such as Sharpness then amp Saturation press lt GE gt Color tone Detail set 27 User Def 1 Set the parameter Picture Style Landscape OSharpness ae e Turn the lt gt dial to set the parameter as desired then press lt gt For details see Customizing a Picture Style on pages 134 136 Picture Style Press the lt MENU gt button to register User Def 1 Landscape 06008060 Al Ee Da Ear EEA Detail set 138 the modified Picture Style The P
99. 34 Shooting is not possible due to an error Turn the camera off and on again or re install the battery gt Operate the power switch remove and install the battery pack again or use a Canon lens p 30 34 If the error still persists write down the error number and contact your nearest Canon Service Center 377 SpecificationS mE e Type Type Digital single lens reflex AF AE camera Recording media CF card Type I UDMA mode 7 compatible SD memory card SDHC memory card SDXC memory card Image sensor size Approx 36 x 24 mm Compatible lenses Canon EF lenses except EF S and EF M lenses 35 mm equivalent lens focal length will be as indicated on the lens Lens mount Canon EF mount e Image Sensor Type CMOS sensor Effective pixels Approx 22 30 megapixels Aspect ratio 3 2 Dust delete feature Auto Manual Dust Delete Data appending e Recording System Recording format Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Image type JPEG RAW 14 bit Canon original RAW JPEG simultaneous recording enabled Recorded pixels L Large Approx 22 10 megapixels 5760 x 3840 M Medium Approx 9 80 megapixels 3840 x 2560 S1 Small 1 Approx 5 50 megapixels 2880 x 1920 S2 Small 2 Approx 2 50 megapixels 1920 x 1280 S3 Small 3 Approx 350 000 pixels 720 x 480 RAW Approx 22 10 megapixels 5760 x 3840 M RAW Approx 10 50 megapixels 3960 x 2640 S RAW Approx 5 50 megapixels 2880
100. 6 or larger maximum aperture lenses Since they have a horizontal pattern it can detect vertical lines They cover the three columns of AF points at the viewfinder s center The center AF point and the AF points above and under the center AF point are geared for f 8 or larger maximum aperture These focusing sensors are geared for f 5 6 or larger maximum aperture lenses They can detect horizontal lines and cover all 61 AF points in a vertical pattern The center AF point and the AF points on the left and right of the center AF point are geared for f 8 or larger maximum aperture Lenses and Usable AF Points mu Q e Although the camera has 61 AF points the number of usable AF points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens The lenses are thereby classified into nine groups from A to I Check which group your lens belongs to e When using a lens in Groups F to H fewer AF points will be usable F When you press the lt gt button the AF points indicated by the O mark will blink The W E AF points will stay lit e When using a lens marked with see page 86 e Regarding new lenses marketed after the EOS 5D Mark III check Canon s Web site to see which group they belong to Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions Group A Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable OOOO OOOOH SES00S8 BEREE V EEBRRES OOOOH
101. 72 symbol p 324 Focus confirmation light p 64 lt a gt AF status indicator p 64 Max burst p 125 Number of remaining multiple exposures p 181 ISO speed p 126 lt D gt Highlight tone priority p 148 Exposure compensation amount p 171 compensation p 190 Flash exposure compensation amount p 190 Shutter speed p 164 AF point selection FE lock FEL __ AF SEL SEL AF Busy buSY AF point registration Multi function lock warning L C 1 HP SEL SEL HP Aperture p 166 Card warning Card 1 2 1 2 The display will show only the settings currently applied 23 Nomenclature Mode Dial Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center Mode Dial lock release button B Bulb p 174 M Manual exposure p 168 Av Aperture priority AE p 166 Tv Shutter priority AE p 164 P Program AE p 162 G Scene Intelligent Auto p 64 Custom shooting modes You can register the shooting mode P Tv Av M B AF mode menu settings etc to Mode Dial settings and shoot p 338 24 Nomenclature EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens Focus mode switch p 39 Distance scale Infrared index Hood mount p 41 Zoom ring p 40 om position index 77 mm filter thread 40 front of lens Focusing ring p 113 216 Image Stabilizer switch p 42 Lens mount index p 39 25 Nomenclature Battery Charger LC E6 Charger for Battery Pa
102. 8L IS II USM Extender EF1 4x EF28 80mm f 2 8 4L USM EF500mm f 4L IS USM EF400mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF70 210mm f 4 EF500mm f 4L IS Il USM EF400mm f 2 8L II USM Extender EF1 4x EF70 200mm f 4L USM EF600mm f 4L USM EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM EF600mm f 4L IS USM EF400mm f 2 8L IS Il USM Extender EF 1 4x EF70 200mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF600mm f 4L IS II USM EF135mm f 2L USM Extender EF2x EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF1 4x TS E17mm f 4L EF200mm f 1 8L USM Extender EF2x EF70 200mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF1 4x e With a TS E lens when focusing manually without tilt shift Group D Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable EEE OONOGBEBONOO OOSOSBEBOFOO OOSOSBEBOFOO 00 0O BEMO O0 OOUNOSGBEBONOO Eee W Dual cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and the focusing precision is higher than with other AF points Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved AF points sensitive to horizontal O O lines EF28mm f 2 8 EF40mm f 2 8 STM 81 Lenses and Usable AF Points Group E Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable E Cross type AF point Subject nen z z z P i E E P P z P tr
103. Av O O Multi function lock p 325 O O Custom Controls Depends on setting 4 3 Others Add cropping information O p 326 Default Erase option During playback 2 4 Clear Selecting 4 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn will clear all the Custom Function settings Fl e The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View LV shooting nor movie shooting Settings are disabled e Even if all the Custom Functions are cleared the settings for 2 Custom Controls will remain unchanged 320 7 Custom Function Settings mam G A E Y M x Under the 9 tab you can customize Seen level paee as various camera features to suit your ISO speed setting increments 1 3 picture taking preferences Any settings ee ae sis different from the default will be Bracketing sequence Number of bracketed shots 3 displayed in blue Safety shift OFF C Fn1 Exposure Exposure level increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 2 1 2 stop Sets 1 2 stop increments for the shutter speed aperture exposure compensation AEB flash exposure compensation etc Effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1 3 stop increments F With 1 2 stop set the exposure level will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel as shown below IE Le 0 LT p213 SO M I ha u i 1 D tt ISO speed setting increments 1 3 1 3 stop 1 1 1 stop Bracketing auto cancel ON Enable When you set the power switch to
104. Bulb exposures 174 Index Custom shooting 0 00 338 Cable ceceeeeees 3 274 277 362 Camera Camera Shake cceeeeeeees 186 Clear camera settings 56 Holding the camera 006 43 Settings display 342 Camera Shake seeen 42 48 Gardien AEE EEEE 15 31 53 Card reminder cceeeeeees 32 Formata ENE 53 Low level format cccccssssseeees 54 Proble M eresien 33 54 Center weighted average AITEAL A Na Goat ET EES EEEE 170 CF card gt Card Charger eeiaiaenesceeetsiiviasvusesssxeaaids 26 28 Chromatic aberration correction 150 Glean Oee e parean a 295 Clear camera settingS 00 56 Color SOACOcieciciscstesrinantssasaeccasnetes 160 Color temperature 139 141 COOP tone sraon i e 135 COMUINUOUS ec cease cecceee th eceeaes 156 Continuous shooting 66 114 COMMAS these ets esis 135 Copyright information 158 Creative Photo 131 175 179 FOV ON oceecupsthasececacmeanaeaeactnnesoacscokb ns 4 Cropping information 0 326 Cross type focuSing 0 74 78 Custom Controls 0008 50 327 Custom Functions ccceeeeeeees 320 Custom shooting mode 338 398 Custom WB acrclaics sasladasantecaal iter 140 S SSSS_eai Date Time wis iavevecwedhannatunepdyyectecreteedss 36 Date time battery replacement neneeese 349 D
105. CF card s images A Play back the SD card s images Turn the lt gt dial to select the card then press lt gt 120 7219 Setting the Image Recording Quality mm You can select the pixel count and the image quality There are eight JPEG image recording quality settings ML ML AM aM 4S1 d S1 S2 S3 There are three RAW image quality settings WWM M GMD S GW p 124 gt a E o Q x Select Image quality Image quality Image review 2 sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Lens aberration correction With Standard Auto switch card Rec to multiple set Image quality Standard AL ree Sree 9991 RAW A E go we Sie JPEG w dL dl aM aM 451 d5 S2 53 With Rec separately set Img type size Rec separately Gy ML P 57ean 9991 E dL 2 iL Image quality Rec separately Co ae E 9991 AL dL dM dM 45 SI 52 53 ED wi sam 1 2 Under the 1 tab select Image quality then press lt gt Select the image recording quality e To select a RAW setting turn the lt 73 gt dial To select a JPEG setting turn the lt gt dial On the upper right the M megapixels x number indicates the recorded pixel count and is the number of possible shots displayed up to 9999 Press lt amp 71 gt to set it e Under 1 Record func card folder sel if Record func is set to Rec separately turn the
106. Disable Tv Av Shutter speed Aperture This takes effect in the shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camera will automatically change the manually selected setting to obtain a standard exposure ISO ISO speed This works in the Program AE P shutter priority AE Tv and aperture priority AE Av modes If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range the camera will automatically change the manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure ir Under 2 ISO speed settings even if ISO speed range or Min shutter spd is changed from the default setting safety shift will override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained e The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO speed will be determined by the Auto ISO range setting p 129 However if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the Auto ISO range the safety shift will take effect up to the manually set ISO speed e f Shutter speed Aperture or ISO speed is set safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used 323 tam Custom Function Settings SSS C Fn2 Disp Operation Warnings in viewfinder When any of the following functions are set the lt gt icon can be displayed on the viewfinder s bottom right p 23
107. E This function is convenient for checking the image s tilt and composition E The grid is not displayed during movie playback 251 INFO Shooting Information Display mam Sample Information for Still Photos AF Microadjustment Protect images Exposure compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount Aperture Rating Folder number File number Card L Histogram Shutter speed PERE EPCTRIT ENTER Brightness RGB Picture Style Settings Metering mode A 4 Shooting mode Dis ie w ISO speed ae Els es ee S000 ee Highlight tone priority White balance S K FOER Vac Maes Bt a A Image recording MaMRAWEY ME Al sRGB Color space quality EEL NFA RE fae eee te SHooting date and time Playback number Total images recorded White balance correction Color temperature when lt amp 4 gt is set File size Eye Fi transfer When you shoot in RAW JPEG image quality the RAW image file size will be displayed During flash photography without flash exposure compensation lt 68 gt will be displayed lt HDR gt and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images taken in the HDR mode lt gt will be displayed for multiple exposure photos For still photos taken during movie shooting lt gt will be displayed For JPEG images developed with the camera s RAW processing function or resized and then saved lt gt will be displayed 202
108. Flash function settings control Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Mirror lockup Disable Enable Fl e Shaded menu options are not displayed in the lt 3 gt mode What is displayed under B 1 Image quality depends on the Record func p 118 setting under 1 Record func card folder sel If Rec separately is set set the image quality for each card 354 Menu Settings 3 Shooting 2 Red Page Exposure 171 compensation AEB 1 8 stop increments 5 stops AEB 3 stops 126 to 130 Auto Lighting Disable Low Standard High Pi Optimizer Disable during manual exposure ISO speed ISO speed range Auto ISO range ISO speed settings Minimum shutter speed Approx 2500 10000 Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance White balance shift White balance correction B AIMIG bias 9 levels each 142 i White balance bracketing B A and W G bias bracketing 143 single level increments 3 levels During movie shooting Expo comp AEB will be Exposure comp 3 Shooting 3 Red EA Auto 22S Standard 22P Portrait Picture Style kzl Landscape E3N Neutral eF Faithful E Monochrome 2 21 User Def 1 2 3 Disable Auto Enable reduction ee Standard Low High Disable reduction Highlight tone priority tone priority Disable Enable Enable 148 BS z imi e White balance AW BI E a ARLI Dust De
109. HOLD S S03 Hl 44 fu IWANVIW NOILONYLSNI Canon EOS 5 Mark III Mark Ill e This manual is for the EOS 5D Mark III installed with firmware version 1 2 0 or later The Software Start Guide is included at the end of this manual INSTRUCTION MANUAL Introduction mem The EOS 5D Mark IIl is a digital single lens reflex camera featuring a fine detail full frame approx 36 x 24 mm CMOS sensor with approx 22 3 effective megapixels DIGIC 5 approx 100 viewfinder coverage high precision and high speed 61 point AF approx 6 fps continuous shooting Live View shooting and Full High Definition Full HD movie shooting Before Starting to Shoot Be Sure to Read the Following To avoid botched pictures and accidents first read the Safety Precautions p 389 391 and Handling Precautions p 14 15 Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera While reading this manual take a few test shots and see how they come out You can then better understand the camera Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused Copyrights Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images of people a
110. ISO Speed Range You can set the manually settable ISO speed range minimum and maximum limits You can set the minimum limit within L ISO 50 to H1 ISO 51200 and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 ISO 102400 Es 1 Select ISO speed settings Expo comp AEB 3 24123 Under the 62 tab select ISO 50 speed settings E speed settings then press lt gt White balance LAINE Custom White Balance WEB Shift Bkt 0 0 0 Color space sRGB ISO speed settings 2 Select ISO speed range ISO speed Auto Select ISO speed range then press 150 speed range 100 25600 E Auto ISO range 100 12800 Se Min shutter spd Auto ISO speed range 3 Set the minimum limit Minimum Maximum Select the minimum limit box then Ke 25600 press lt gt Turn the lt gt dial to select the minimum limit ISO speed then press lt gt ISO speed range A Set the maximum limit Minimum Maximum e Select the maximum limit box then L 50 H2 102400 press lt gt i Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the maximum limit ISO speed then press lt 1 gt 5 Exit the setting e Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt gt The menu reappears 128 ISO Setting the ISO Speed EM Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100 25600 You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 12800 and the maximum limit within ISO 200
111. Images to a Personal Computer p 315 You can connect the camera to a personal computer and operate the camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the personal computer Preparing to Print me The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor Connecting the Camera to a Printer 1 Set the camera s power switch to lt OFF gt Set up the printer e For details refer to the printer s instruction manual ae 3 Connecting the camera to the printer e Use the interface cable provided with or the camera Connect the cable to the camera s lt DIGITAL gt terminal with the cable plug s lt gt icon facing the front of the camera To connect to the printer refer to the printer s instruction manual A Turn on the printer 5 Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt gt Some printers may make a beeping sound Preparing to Print ae PictBridge Play back the image Sse 2 e Press the lt L gt button gt The image will appear and the lt y gt Po nes icon will appear on the upper left to Pees 2 OFF indicate that the camera is connected Seip lem to a printer E Photo K Borderless QD e Movies cannot be printed e The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only with CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct e Do not use any interface cable other than the
112. Optimizer The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect NR High ISO speed noise reduction p 145 You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view 4L Image quality p 121 You can set the image quality of the JPEG image to be saved when converting the RAW image The image size displayed such as M x has a 3 2 aspect ratio The pixel count of each aspect ratio is indicated on page 294 290 RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera sRGB Color space p 160 You can select either SRGB or Adobe RGB Since the camera s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB the image will not look very different when either color space is set Jor Peripheral illumination correction p 149 lf Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image and check the corners Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view The peripheral illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional provided software and may be less apparent In such a case use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction or Distortion correct
113. Press lt 61 gt to magnify the images recorded on the card See p 257 for the operation procedure You can also magnify the Live View image during Live View shooting and movie shooting when focusing with Live Mode Quick Mode and manual focus p 212 216 OFF No function disabled Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button 336 mM Registering My Menu uum Under the My Menu tab you can register up to six menu options and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently O a E y o Be 1 Select My Menu settings My Menu settings Under the xX tab select My Menu settings then press lt gt My Menu settings Select Register to My Menu Register to My Menu Select Register to My Menu then Sort Delete item items press lt gt Delete all items Display from My Menu Disable Select item to register 3 Register the desired items Image quality i Select an item to register then press Image review Beep lt gt Release shutter without card On the confirmation dialog select OK Lens aberration correction H Sy Satria SARL Cost and press lt gt tO register the item MENU E You can register up to six items To return to the screen in step 2 press the lt MENU gt button About My Menu Settings Sort You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu Select Sort and select the item whose order you want to change Then p
114. Print Starts the printing Sets the printing effects p 306 Sets the date or file number imprinting to on The paper size type and layout you have set are displayed Depending on the printer certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and trimming may not be selectable SE default 3 Select Paper settings re orf Select Paper settings then press Jim 1 copies lt gt Jamming gt The paper settings screen will GT 913cm Paper settings B Photo Cancel appear Borderless Print 304 Printing T T QJ Setting the Paper Size j B Paper size Select the size of the paper loaded in I the printer then press lt gt 13x18 eee The paper type screen will appear CreditCard Setting the Paper Type F g Paper type Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer then press lt G1 gt Fast photo gt The page layout screen will appear Default Setting the Page Layout ay le A Page layout Select the page layout then press Bordered lt G1 gt gt The print settings screen will Bordered HI Default reappear Bordered The print will have white borders along the edges Borderless The print will have no borders If your printer cannot print borderless prints the print will have borders _ The shooting information will be imprinted on the border on Bordered Ei 9x13 cm and larger prints xx uUp O Option to print 2 4 8 9 16 or 20 images on
115. Shooting mode Autoexposure Shutter priority AE a Aperture priority AE E Manual exposure Highlight tone priority Frame rate Compression method Aperture Digital compass PENEN ISO speed Movie shooting remaining time Possibleshot Elapsed time Level meter Exposure level Applies to a single movie clip El e You can display the electronic level by pressing the lt INFO gt button p 60 e Note that if the AF mode is set to 4 Live mode or the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable p 274 the electronic level cannot be displayed e If there is no card in the camera the movie shooting remaining time will be displayed in red e When movie shooting starts the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time 22 Shooting Movies EES Notes on Movie Shooting QD e The camera cannot autofocus continuously like a camcorder e Autofocusing during movie shooting may momentarily throw the focus far off or change the exposure e During movie shooting do not point the lens toward the sun The sun s heat can damage the camera s internal components e Under 1 Record func card folder sel even if Record func is set to Rec to multiple p 118 the movie cannot be recorded to both the multiple is set the movie will be recorded to the card which has been set for Playback e f lt 2MWB gt is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie shooting the whit
116. Sound recording 236 Still MOTOS fs cceestousancssewvene 230 Time code sacendtestassdovvoereaamnennds 239 View on TV ccce 265 274 Wind filter stececucwwietontod eens 4 bith hus 236 M RAW Medium RAW 121 124 Multi function 73 190 329 Multi controller cccccsseeeeeeeeeees 47 Multi function lOCK c00eeee 47 Multiple exposures ccee 179 My IMIGTINDLadececncceccccttgetiiie aloelhh yy 337 Noise reduction High ISO speed 145 Long exposures eee 146 Nomenclature ccccccssssseeeeeeeeees 18 Non Canon flash units 191 Normal Image recording quality 121 NTSG cette ses tec tet 233 360 OO ONE SHOT One Shot AF 70 One Shot AF ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 PP sisal O e 233 360 Partial metering 169 PG terminal ienien niii 191 Peripheral illumination Correcto Mea esaeen ee 149 Personal white balance 141 PIB ge rE Ee E 301 Picture Style 0 131 134 137 PIXE S rE 121 Playback oeenn e aeaa 249 Possible shots 35 123 201 Power Auto power off eseese 55 Battery check 35 344 Battery info esenee 344 Household power sssssssssesesseeee 348 Possible shots 35 123 201 ROCNAIO Cee ssccee rere edie 28 Recharge performance 344 Pressing completely 008 44 Pressing halfway 44 PrN geeis neresna aana 301 Layout enan 305 Pape
117. Using an EX series Speedlite Sold Separately Equipped with an LED Light During movie shooting in the P Tv Av or B mode this camera supports the function that turns the Speedlite s LED light automatically in low light conditions For details refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual 224 Shooting Movies Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed aperture and ISO speed for movie shooting Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users 2h cull x Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt ay 3 Set the ISO speed uo m d e Press the lt SO 4 gt button gt The ISO speed setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor e Turn the lt gt dial to set the ISO speed e For details on the ISO speed see the next page A Set the shutter speed and i aperture Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator To set the shutter speed turn the lt gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate lt I gt Bo 5 Img 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec e 6o I50 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec To setthe aperture turn the lt gt dial e f it cannot be set set the lt LOCKP gt switch to the left then turn the lt s73 gt or lt gt dial 5 Focus and shoot the movie e The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 220 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt
118. When printing with DPOF you must use the card whose print order specifications have been set It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to print them e Certain DPOF compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified If this happens with your printer refer to the printer s instruction manual Or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints e Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a different camera and then try to specify a print order The print order may not work or may be overwritten Also depending on the image type the print order may not be possible F RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered You can print RAW images with PictBridge p 302 312 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF ee T Print Ordering Sel lmage Print order i Select and order images one by one G Standard 7 prints If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the me 5 Tas lt gt dial counterclockwise you can File No ot select an image from a three image Seo n display To return to the single image e aoe display turn the lt gt dial clockwise Press the lt MENU gt button to save the print order to the card rs Standard Both riri 7S Press lt gt and a print order for one Quantity copy of the displayed image will be Total images selected placed By turning the lt 32 gt dial you can set the quantity up
119. acking is superior and high NOOO see OOoE precision focusing is achieved ie ier O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF50mm f 2 5 Compact EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM Macro LIFE SIZE Converter Extender EF2x EF28 105mm 3 5 4 5 II USM EF100mm f 2 8 Macro USM EF300mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF2x EF28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF400mm f 5 6L USM EF400mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF2x EF28 200mm 1 3 5 5 6 EF500mm f 4 5L USM EF400mm f 2 8L II USM Extender EF2x EF28 200mm f 3 5 5 6 USM EF300mm f 4L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF400mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF2x EF28 300mm 3 5 5 6L IS USM EF300mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF400mm f 2 8L IS II USM Extender EF2x EF35 105mm 1 3 5 4 5 EF400mm f 4 DO IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF20 35mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF35 135mm 3 5 4 5 EF400mm f 4 DO IS II USM Extender EF1 4x EF24 85mm f 3 5 4 5 USM EF35 135mm f 4 5 6 USM EF500mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF24 105mm 3 5 5 6 IS STM EF38 76mm 1 4 5 5 6 EF500mm f 4L IS II USM Extender EF1 4x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 EF50 200mm 1 3 5 4 5 EF600mm f 4L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 USM EF50 200mm f 3 5 4 5L EF600mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF1 4x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 II EF55 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF600mm f 4L IS II USM Extender EF1 4x EF28 90mm f 4 5 6 II USM EF55 200mm 4 5 5 6 Il USM EF200mm f 2 8L USM
120. age e Ifthe LCD monitor is dirty use a soft cloth to clean it In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or may look black It will return to normal at room temperature Eye Fi settings does not appear e Eye Fi settings will appear only when an Eye Fi card is inserted into the camera If the Eye Fi card has a write protect switch set to the LOCK position you will not be able to check the card s connection status or disable Eye Fi card transmission p 350 Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black e 3 Highlight alert is set to Enable p 253 A red box is displayed on the image 3 AF point disp is set to Enable p 253 The image cannot be erased Ifthe image is protected it cannot be erased p 278 The movie cannot play e Movies edited with a personal computer cannot be played with the camera When the movie is played camera operation noise can be heard e f you operate the camera s dials or lens during movie shooting the operation noise will also be recorded Use an external microphone commercially available p 237 374 Troubleshooting Guide The movie has still moments e During autoexposure movie shooting if there is a drastic change in the exposure level the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes If this happens shoot with lt M gt shooting mode p 225 No image appears on the TV screen e Use the stereo AV
121. aken with another camera The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name was changed gt Image Playback uuu Single Image Display No information W275 f 15 a ee i ll w F P Pi B P Ce E Gas200 Pea ol wl 628 008 3 24 ww Histogram 250 100 0003 i Play back the image e Press the lt L gt gt button gt The last captured image or last image viewed will appear Select an image e To play back images starting with the last image turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise To play back images starting with the first captured image turn the dial clockwise e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the display format will change 25 80 Bel shi MEE yore 3 24 With basic information BS E4 100 0003 i po w E H 4 0 0 0 2 a Fe P Hm es Gas200 PPA Gi oes wl 25 0MM sh 3 24 01711 2012 13 30 00 Shooting information display gt Image Playback 3 Exit the image playback e Press the lt L gt gt button to exit the image playback and return to shooting ready state uam Grid Display In single image display and two image display p 259 display you can overlay the grid on the image playback SS ae With 13 Playback grid you can exd ii select 3x3 6x4 or 3x3 diag ax3 diag ee S
122. alled AF Microadjustment Before making the adjustment read Notes for AF Microadjustment on page 111 q Normally this adjustment is not required Do this adjustment only if necessary Note that doing this adjustment may prevent correct focusing from being achieved Adjust All by Same Amount Set the adjustment manually by adjusting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made During AF regardless of the lens used the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount oF a 1 Select AF Microadjustment Manual AF pt selec pattern aa e Under the AF5 tab select AF oF point display Puring focus Microadjustment then press lt gt VF display illumination AF Microadjustment AF Microadjustment m 2 Select All by same amount Adjust focus for all lenses by e Turn the lt gt dial to select All by the same adjustment amount same amount Disable All by same amount 0 Adjust by lens W 40 T 0 i Change fa dear all 3 Press the lt INFO gt button gt The All by same amount screen will appear 106 ta Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus E AF Microadjustment AF A Make the adjustment AR by ig tla Turn the lt gt dial to make the Nee adjustment The adjustable range is 20 steps Setting it toward will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus Setting it toward Aa will shif
123. an be set within ISO 100 25600 in 1 3 stop increments e A indicates ISO Auto The ISO speed will be set automatically p 127 ISO Speed Shooting Situation No flash Flash Range Higher ISO speeds will result in grainier images QD e if 3 Highlight tone priority has been set to Enable you cannot select L ISO 50 ISO 100 125 160 H1 ISO 51200 and H2 ISO 102400 p 148 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image e When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise dots of light banding etc may become noticeable When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise such as a combination of high ISO speed high temperature and long exposure images may not be recorded properly 126 ISO Setting the ISO Speed EE e As H1 equivalent to ISO 51200 and H2 equivalent to 102400 are expanded ISO speed settings noise dots of light banding etc and irregular colors will be more noticeable and the resolution lower than usual e f you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject overexposure may result e f you shoot a movie when Maximum 25600 is set with ISO speed range and ISO speed is set to ISO 16000 20000 25600 the ISO speed will switch to IS012800 during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo s
124. an set flash exposure compensation up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments Press the camera s lt ISO 4 gt button then turn the lt 2 gt dial while looking in the viewfinder or at the LCD panel CD lf 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 is not set to Disable the image may still look bright even if a darker flash exposure compensation amount has been set E When it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus the EOS dedicated external Speedlite may automatically emit the AF assist beam 190 4 Flash Photography eee Using Non EX series Canon Speedlites e With an EZ E EG ML TL series Speedlite set to A TTL or TTL autoflash mode the flash can be fired at full output only Set the camera s shooting mode to lt M gt manual exposure or lt Av gt aperture priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode shoot in the manual flash mode Using Non Canon Flash Units Sync Speed The camera can synchronize with non Canon compact flash units at 1 200 sec and slower speeds With large studio flash units since the flash duration is longer than compact flash units set the sync speed within 1 60 sec to 1 30 sec Be sure to test the flash synchronization D before shooting e The camera s PC terminal can be used with flash units having a sync cord The PC terminal is threaded to prevent inadvertent disconnection The camera s PC terminal ha
125. and using a household power outlet use only AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 rated input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz rated output 8 0 V DC Using anything else can cause fire overheating or electrical shock USA and Canada only The Lithium ion polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable Please call 1 800 8 BAT TERY for information on how to recycle this battery For CA USA only Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www disc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for details CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION 392 15 Software Start Guide This chapter gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD ROM provided with the camera and explains how to install the software ona personal computer It also explains how to view the Software Instruction Manuals Canon EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Software Software Instruction Manuals Software Start Guide memm EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras are contained on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk EOS Utility With the camera connected to a personal computer EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer You can also use the personal computer to set various camera settings
126. anges 2 Main Dial After you press the lt E gt button turning the lt gt dial changes the AF area selection mode E When amp Main Dial is set use the lt gt to move the AF point horizontally 102 TM Customizing AF Functions SSS Orientation linked AF point You can set the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Orientation linked AF point k Same for both vert horiz Same for both vert horiz The same AF area selection mode and Select separate AF points manually selected AF point or Zone are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting Ol Select separate AF points The AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone can be set separately for each camera orientation 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical with the camera grip at the top 3 Vertical with the camera grip at the bottom Convenient when for instance you want to keep using the right AF point during all camera orientations When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point or Zone with Zone AF for each of the three camera orientations they will be set for the respective orientation Whenever you change the camera orientation the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode and manually selected AF point or Zone set for that orientation GD e f you clear the camera settings to their defaults p 56 the se
127. applied automatically for any lens whose correction data has been registered in the camera With EOS Utility provided software you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 396 Notes for peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction QD e Corrections cannot be applied to JPEG images captured when Disable was set When using a non Canon lens setting the corrections to Disable is recommended even if Correction data available is displayed e f you use the magnified view during Live View shooting the peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be reflected in the image Fl e f the effect of the correction is not so visible magnify the image and check it e The corrections are also applied when an Extender is attached e f the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera the result will be the same as when the correction is set to Disable e Ifthe lens does not have distance information the correction amount will be lower 151 7219 Creating and Selecting a Folder mam You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images Creating a Folder
128. arately is attached HDMI frame rate Auto 24p 60i 50i GPS device settings Language Select the interface language 246 Q When using a GPS device or a Wireless File Transmitter be sure to check the countries and areas of use and use the device in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or region 359 Menu Settings Set up 3 Yellow Page Power Remaining capacity Shutter count Battery info Recharge performance Battery registration Battery history Auto cleaning Enable Disable 296 Sensor cleaning Clean now Clean manually 299 iz button display Displays camera settings Electronic level 342 options Displays shooting functions l 261 button function Rating Protect 279 Communication Displayed when WFT E7 sold separately is settings attached Set up 4 Yellow Resets the camera to the default settings Display copyright information Enter author s name 158 Enter copyright details Delete copyright information For updating the firmware x My Menu Green My Menu settings Register frequently used menu options and Custom Functions 360 Menu Settings For Movie Shooting 3 Shooting 4 Movie Red Page AF mode Live mode 1 Live mode Quick mode Grid display Off 3x3 E 6x4 Ht 3x3 diag 1920x1080 T3 I Ta A PB Movie recording size 1280x720 Teb 05 LHI PB 640x480 I I IPB Sound recording Au
129. ately is recommended Holding the Camera To obtain sharp images hold the camera still to minimize camera shake Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting 1 Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly 2 Hold the lens bottom with your left hand 3 Rest your hand s right index finger lightly on the shutter button 4 Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body 5 To maintain a stable stance place one foot slightly ahead of the other 6 Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder E To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see page 68 43 Basic Operation Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps You can press the shutter button halfway Then you can further press the shutter button completely Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture The exposure setting shutter speed and aperture is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel 4 Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture Preventing Camera Shake Hand held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake It can cause blurred pictures To prevent camera shake note the following e Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page e Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus then slowly press the shutter button compl
130. aylight saving time ee 37 DC coupler sue iireres ce eam dees 348 Depth of field preview 167 200 203 Dial Mai Dialisi ie n 45 Quick Control Dial 0 46 Digital terminal 000 302 315 Dioptric adjustment ee 43 Direct printing ce cccth venntncocsescesseesarnes 314 Direct selection AF point 332 LO emer ee Rene er ps Serene roe 311 Drive MOUS veaikainainanctionedsdesvwnctaeast 114 Dust Delete Data 297 SES Saas Electronic level 60 335 Erase IMAGE widitvbnnwertiniatoennetan 283 EOMCOGGS sis ur ces riyinss tiisenacceenties 377 Evaluative metering 169 COXA E abl as 54 Exposure compensation 171 Exposure level increments 321 Exposure level indicator 22 23 343 Exposure simulation 00 207 Extension asvecrttienincatssvccwevitaiiuceers 155 External Speedlite Flash EE VOCUD s sirnaa naa 187 EV CsI Cal Cutis Oooo aie 350 Eyepiece COVEL eee 27 187 Index PE OCI on te A 190 Feature guide 61 Filename nein 154 156 File SIZE aa 123 234 252 Fitereffect seai eea 136 Final image simulation 203 229 Fine Image recording quality 121 Firmware VEL 0cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 360 First curtain synchronization 196 Flash Speedlite Custom Functions 0006 198 External Speedlite 190 PE OC Kies dethvconhenaanxahoseneations encher 190 Flash cont
131. be completed and you can use the SD card as usual QD e Cards with 128 GB or lower capacity will be formatted in FAT format Cards with a capacity higher than 128 GB will be formatted in exFAT format If you format a card with a capacity over 128 GB with this camera and then insert it into another camera an error may be displayed and the card may become impossible to use Depending on the personal computer s OS or card reader it may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT format e When the card is formatted or data is erased only the file management information is changed The actual data is not completely erased Be aware of this when selling or discarding the card When discarding the card execute low level formatting or destroy the card physically to prevent the data from being leaked e Before using a new Eye Fi card the software in the card must be installed in your computer Then format the card with the camera Fl e The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card e This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft 54 Before You Start tM Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off To save battery power the camera turns off automatically after a set time of idle operation elapses If you do not want the camera to turn off automatically set this to Disable After the power turns off you can turn on the camera again by pressing the shutte
132. been approved for use in your area please check with the card manufacturer 1 Insert an Eye Fi card p 31 AF E Oe 2 Select Eye Fi settings Record func card folder sel e Under the 1 tab select Eye Fi bs ii LORUS settings then press lt 6 gt Auto rotate onc e This menu is displayed only when an ee Eye Fi card is inserted into the camera Eye Fi settings Eye Fi settings Enable Eye Fi transmission Breit Disable Press lt gt set Eye Fi trans to Enable then press lt gt e If you set Disable automatic transmission will not occur even with the Eye Fi card inserted Transmission status icon Enable Eye Fi settings A Display the connection Eye Fi trans Enable information n Select Connection info then press lt G1 gt 350 Using Eye Fi Cards Connection info 5 Check the Access point SSID Access point SSID Check that an access point is ABCDEFG1 234567890 i Eariniaclich a Se Correcting displayed for Access point SSID MAC address 00 12 5a 07 4b 9c e You can also check the Eye Fi card s Eye Fi firmware Ver i SOA in 8 A Ge MAC address and firmware version e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu 6 Take the picture gt The picture is transferred and the onesHot GH a lt gt icon switches from gray Not connected to one of the icons below e For transferred images is displayed in the shooting information display p 25
133. before printing If you set the trimming and then set the print settings you may have to set the trimming again before printing 1 Onthe print settings screen select Trimming 2 Set the trimming frame size position and aspect ratio e The image area within the trimming frame will be printed The trimming frame s aspect ratio can be changed with Paper settings Changing the trimming frame size Turn the lt g gt dial to change the trimming frame size The smaller the trimming frame the larger the image magnification will be for printing Moving the trimming frame Use lt gt to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally Move the trimming frame until it covers the desired image area Rotating the frame Pressing the lt INFO gt button will toggle the trimming frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations This enables you to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image Image tilt correction By turning the lt 3 gt dial you can adjust the image tilt angle up to 10 degrees in 0 5 degree increments When you adjust the image tilt the lt g gt icon on the screen will turn blue 3 Press lt gt to exit the trimming gt The print settings screen will reappear You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the print settings screen 309 P Printing er QD e Depending on the printer the trimmed image area may not be printed as you specified e The s
134. brackets the exposure up to 3 stops in 1 3 stop increments for three successive shots This is called AEB AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing Es 1 Select Expo comp AEB Expo comp AEB 34441 13 e Under the 482 tab select Expo Spe eae comp AEB then press lt gt Exposure comp AEB setting 2 Set the AEB range Turn the lt s gt dial to set the AEB range If you turn lt 3 gt you can set the exposure compensation Press lt amp 7 gt to set it gt When you exit the menu lt Kh gt and the AEB range will be displayed on the LCD panel Darker Brighter DIES ARPA ee AEE 3 Take the picture The three bracketed shots will be taken according to the drive mode set in this sequence Standard exposure decreased exposure and increased exposure e AEB will not be automatically canceled To cancel AEB follow step 2 to turn off the AEB range display F e During AEB shooting lt gt and lt gt will blink respectively in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Ifthe drive mode is set to lt L gt or lt S gt press the shutter button three times for each shot When lt HiH gt lt H gt or lt Gli gt is set and you hold down the shutter button completely the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting When lt j gt or lt 82 gt is set the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously after a 10 sec or 2 sec dela
135. button p 33 20 Nomenclature LCD Panel Shutter speed FE lock FEL Busy buSY Multi function lock warning L No card warning Card Error code Err Cleaning image sensor CLn Aperture AF point selection C__ AF SEL SEL AF AF point registration C HP SEL SEL HP Card warning Card 1 2 1 2 Possible shots S elf timer countdown Bulb exposure time Card full warning Full Card error warning Erm White balance p 139 Error No Auto Remaining images to record Daylight fix Shade AF mode p 70 Cloudy EE ee ONE SHOT Tungsten T One Shot AF light D A A al a5 Al FOCUS ta White Al Focus AF fluorescent Al SERVO light Al Servo AF 4 Flash M FOCUS Custom Manual focus 4 Color temperature Drive mode p 114 lt WB gt White balance I Single shooting correction p 142 AH High speed continuous shooting lt AB gt GPS device connected Low speed i continuous shooting lt E gt Auto Lighting Optimizer Os Silent single shooting p 144 sS Silent continuous shooting F 10 sec Self timer Remote control 582 2 sec Self timer lt B W gt Monochrome shooting p 133 Remote control lt HDR gt HDR shooting p 175 lt gt Multiple exposure shooting p 179 lt A7 gt Mirror lockup p 186 The display will show only the settings currently applied 21 Nomenclature lt li gt CF card indicator lt gt SD card selection icon lt
136. cable that came with the camera p 277 e Make sure the stereo AV cable or HDMI cable s plug is inserted all the way in p 274 277 Set the video OUT system NTSC PAL to the same video system as the TV set p 277 e Even if you play back an image when 35 HDMI output LCD is set to Mirroring the image will not appear on the TV specified as HDMI output There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot e lf the movie file size reaches 4 GB another movie file will be created automatically p 234 My card reader does not recognize the card e If you format a card of 128 GB or higher with this camera it will be formatted in exFAT This means that some card readers and computer operating systems might not recognize the card properly In such a case connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility provided software p 394 cannot process the RAW image eM and S images cannot be processed with the camera Use the provided software Digital Photo Professional to process the image p 394 375 Troubleshooting Guide cannot resize the image e 3 JPEG images and G M M S images cannot be resized with the camera p 293 Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning e f you selected Clean now c the shutter will make a noise but no picture is taken p 296 Automatic sensor c
137. cally e Press the lt gt button to end the Live View shooting 68 Setting the AF and Drive Modes The 61 AF points in the viewfinder make AF shooting suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes You can also select the AF mode and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject e A x icon atthe upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt Inthe lt j gt mode the AF mode and AF point AF area selection mode will be set automatically F lt AF gt stands for autofocus lt MF gt stands for manual focus AF Selecting the AF Mode mememe You can select the AF mode to suit the shooting conditions or subject In the lt gt mode Al Focus AF is set automatically On the lens set the focus mode switch to lt AF gt 2 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 46 3 Select the AF mode While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt s gt dial ONE SHOT One Shot AF Al FOCUS Al Focus AF Al SERVO Al Servo AF Fl In the P Tv Av M B shooting modes AF is also possible by pressing the lt AF ON gt button One Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus only once
138. can cause camera misoperation e f the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room condensation may form on the camera and internal parts To prevent condensation first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag e f condensation forms on the camera do not use the camera This is to avoid damaging the camera If there is condensation remove the lens card and battery from the camera and wait until the condensation has evaporated before using the camera e f the camera will not be used for an extended period remove the battery and store the camera in a cool dry well ventilated location Even while the camera is in storage press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working e Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a darkroom or chemical lab e f the camera has not been used for an extended period test all its functions before using it If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot coming up have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly 14 Handling Precautions ae LCD Panel and LCD Monitor e Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99 99 effective pixels there may be a few dead pixels among the remaining 0 01 or less pix
139. can cause the image to come out dark To prevent this use the eyepiece cover p 27 attached to the camera strap During Live View shooting and movie shooting attaching the eyepiece cover is not necessary 1 Remove the eyecup e While grasping both sides of the eyecup slide it upward to remove 2 Attach the eyepiece cover Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it f Using a Remote Switch me You can connect the Remote Switch RS 80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 both sold separately or any EOS accessory equipped with an N3 type terminal to the camera for shooting p 362 To operate the accessory refer to its instruction manual 1 Open the terminal cover Connect the plug to the remote control terminal Connect the plug as shown in the illustration e To disconnect the plug grasp the silver part and pull 187 Remote Control Shooting see With Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately you can shoot remotely up to approx 5 meters 16 4 feet from the camera You can either shoot immediately or use a 2 SEC delay You can also use Remote Controller RC 1 and RC 5 1 2 3 4 sensor Focus the subject Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt e You can also shoot with lt AF gt Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 46 Select the self timer e Look at the LCD panel and tur
140. cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 4 Setting the Color Temperature ccccceeeeetteeteeereteee 141 WE White Balance CornrectiOniaksthat out arducdoteaceanientetaelt 142 Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically Auto Lighting Optimizer 144 N Contents Noise Reduction Settings ciicesscpeesagy ara xt oatideastenieassecaateere tients 145 Fignlight Tone Priory ssnosiisssss naia etmek ee 8 steer A 148 Lens Peripheral Illumination Chromatic Aberration Correction 149 Creating and Selecting a Folder seseeeeseenenteeeeeeeeeeeees 152 Changing the File Naini sis eceniAcitcestertrtaniainbaecnciisbadvan 154 File Numbering Methods cs iccasncdicacscevadsadvede seine aseatenaversaveanvereadented 156 Setting Copyright Informational es aaa nnn 158 Setting the Color Space lt idsvesciseisdenwventdevasinnialnniendiontenaamenss 160 5 Advanced Operations P7 Progam AEs oe ea E NS 162 Tv Shutter Priority Ab ie cciels ciel acecoeletescouenelitas downside 164 Av Aperture Priority AE cccccccccsccsecceccecsseceseeneecseeeseeeseeees 166 Depth of Field PreViGW siiasiscias dicaneetinvervedaitdecbcssedescateaseareredasans 167 M Manual Exposure ccccccccssccssccseceseecsecnsecseeceeeseecaeenseessens 168 Selecting the Metering Mode ccccccccceccscsscesessessesseeesenees 169 Setting Exposure Compensation cccecceceeeeeenennnneneaeeeeeeeeees 171 K Au
141. ch the camera s internal clock Frames will be set to 00 QD If Free run is set and you change the time zone or daylight saving time p 36 the time code will be affected 239 M9 Setting the Time Code a a Movie Recording Count You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen Rec time Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie shooting Time code Indicates the time code during movie shooting QW Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code Fl Regardless of the Movie rec count setting the time code will always be recorded to the movie file Movie Playback Count You can select what to display on the movie playback screen Rec time Displays the recording time and playback time during movie playback Time code Displays the time code during movie playback With Time code set r a ee During movie shooting During movie playback F e f you change the setting for either Movie play count in 65 movie Time code or for P 13 Movie play count the other setting will also change automatically e Frames are not displayed during movie shooting and movie playback 240 M9 Setting the Time Code Se HDMI Time code You can append the time code to a movie that was output from HDMI p 246 On Time code is appended to the HDMI output image Off Time code is not appended
142. ck LP E6 LP E6N p 28 a Power plug Battery pack slot IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS For connection to a supply not in the U S A use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed Battery Charger LC E6E Charger for Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N p 28 Charge lamp f N Battery pack slot 26 Getting Started This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera s strap mount eyelet from the bottom Then pass it through the strap s buckle as shown in the illustration Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle The eyepiece cover is also attached to the strap p 187 Eyepiece cover Charging the Battery mx 1 Remove the protective cover Detach the protective cover provided with the battery 2 Attach the battery e As shown in the illustration attach the battery securely to the charger e To detach the battery follow the above procedure in reverse Recharge the battery For LC E6 e As shown by the arrow flip out the battery charger s prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet For LC E6E Connect the power cor
143. ck is applied at the center AF point When the lens focus mode switch is set to lt MF gt AE lock is applied at the center AF point Fl AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures 173 B Bulb Exposures mx When bulb is set the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely and closes when you let go of the shutter button This is called bulb exposure Use bulb exposures for night scenes fireworks the heavens and other subjects requiring long exposures 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt B gt 2 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt g gt or lt gt dial Take the picture While you hold down the shutter button the exposure will continue gt The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD panel 4D e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components e Long exposures produce more noise than usual e f ISO Auto is set the ISO speed will be fixed at ISO 400 p 127 Fl When 833 Long exp noise reduction is set to Auto or Enable noise generated by the long exposure can be reduced p 146 e For bulb exposures using a tripod and Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately is recommended p 187 e You can also use a
144. ckground may come out dark 1 200 1 200 sec fixed The flash sync speed is fixed at 1 200 sec This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto However in low light the subject s background will come out darker than with 1 200 1 60 sec auto QD If 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed has been set high speed sync is not possible in the lt Av gt mode 194 TAM Setting the Flash a a T Flash function settings On the screen the settable functions and the display will differ depending on the Speedlite current flash mode flash Custom Function settings etc For details on your Speedlite s flash functions refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Sample display Wireless functions Flash function settings Flash zoom Flash mode aE Oa eu lle Flash coverage Shutter k a0 FEBRIE Flash exposure synchronization bracketing Flash exposure E TTL II flash metering compensation e Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting Bari Ode E TTL Il flash metering is the standard mode of EX series Speedlites for E TTL I flash metering automatic flash shooting ETTL M MUTI ExtA ExtM The Manual flash mode is for setting the Speedlite s Flash output level yourself For other flash modes refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual 195 TAM Setting the Flash E e Wireless functions Wi
145. corded on one card can be copied to the other card uam Copying Individual Images O aree o x Select Image copy Protect images e Under the L gt 1 tab select Image Rotate image rae es copy then press lt gt Print order Image copy RAW image processing Filmage copy 2 Select Sel Image Ste B Check the copy source and target card s capacity Freespace B 7 72 GB e Turn the lt gt dial to select Sel image Sel ia All image Sel Image then press lt gt MENU fea Lowest file number 3 Select the folder Number of images in folder e Turn the lt gt dial to select the folder FaSource folder i containing the image to be copied then press lt gt Refer to the images displayed on the right to select the desired folder gt The images in the selected folder will be displayed TOQEOSSD 101E0550 Folder name Highest file number F The copy source is the card selected in the 1 Record func card folder sel menu s Record play Playback setting 280 Copying Images a sa a nT Total images selected A Select the images to be copied Turn the lt gt dial to select an image to be copied then press lt gt gt The lt v gt icon will appear on the upper left of the screen e If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn
146. crements 5 stops for still photos ISO speed Scene Intelligent Auto and Tv Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 Recommended P Av and B Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 exposure index expandable to H equivalent to ISO 25600 M Auto ISO automatically set within ISO 100 12800 ISO 100 12800 set manually in 1 3 or whole stop increments expandable to H equivalent to ISO 16000 20000 25600 Time code Supported Drop frames Compatible with 60p 30p Sound recording Built in monaural microphone external stereo microphone terminal provided Sound recording level adjustable wind filter provided Headphones Headphone terminal provided Grid display Three types Still photos Possible Two screen display Simultaneous display of LCD monitor and HDMI output image is possible HDMI output Image without information display can be output Selectable from Auto 24p 60i and 50i e LCD Monitor Type TFT color liquid crystal monitor Monitor size and dots Wide 8 1 cm 3 2 in 3 2 with approx 1 04 million dots Brightness adjustment Auto Dark Standard Bright Manual 7 levels Electronic level Provided Interface languages 25 Feature guide Displayable e Playback Image display formats Single image display Single image Info display Basic info shooting info histogram 4 image index 9 image index 2 image display Highlight alert Overexposed highlights blink AF point display Possible
147. ct the metering mode While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt g gt dial Evaluative metering S Partial metering Spot metering C Center weighted average metering Evaluative metering This is a general purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene Partial metering Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to backlighting etc Partial metering covers approx 6 2 of the viewfinder area at the center 169 Selecting the Metering Mode Spot metering This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or scene The metering is weighted at the center covering approx 1 5 of the viewfinder area C Center weighted average metering The metering is weighted at the center and then averaged for the entire scene Fl When lt e gt is set lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder p 324 170 Setting Exposure Compensation mau Exposure compensation can brighten increased exposure or darken decreased exposure the standard exposure set by the camera Exposure compensation can be set in the P Tv Av shooting modes Although you can set the exposure compensation up to 5 stops in 1 3 stop increments the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can only display the setti
148. ctr entail 280 ASC oes eee nia annancaeeemaneaay 283 Highlight alert 253 Histogram 254 INAEX Ts EE 255 Jump display Image browsing e 256 Magnified View sssaaa 257 Manual rotate 0 0 2 eee 260 Index IO icc cdeaie alana thc omens acai eens 156 Playpack oinen oinn 249 ProteCt cu ssihatncintttewncccttuseuasaades 278 RANG Scerri 261 Shooting information 252 Slide SNOW Sirie oein aans 271 Transf Gl irra 315 Two image display 00 259 View on TV vcsusccseeveccee 265 274 Image dust prevention 0 295 Image review eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 55 Image Stabilizer lens 0006 42 Image recording quality 121 Index GISDIAY sniiecte cect et eee ats 255 INFO button 202 227 250 342 PBe eee eect 233 ISO speed c ccceeees 126 223 226 Automatic setting Auto 127 Automatic setting range 129 ISO expansion 128 Manual Setting range 128 Minimum shutter speed 130 Setting incremenits 0008 321 ext Wegener re aeea 121 Jump display teeeesisrreeeeeeteriienn 256 PAN GQUAGES i sssscddctvorawmmessesnccadatilebinnss 38 Large Image recording quality 123 ECD MONTOT eaa 15 Brightness adjustment 285 Electronic level cccc ceeeeeeeees 60 Image playback eee 249 Menu SCIre en ceceeees 51 354 Shooting settings display
149. ctrical contacts in the illustration e Repeat this procedure for all of your battery packs so you can easily see the serial number GD e Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in step 2 Otherwise the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the battery or impossible to turn on the camera e f you use Battery Grip BG E11 the label may peel off as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery pack If it peels off affix a new label 346 ua Checking the Battery Information CE Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack even when not installed and also when it was last used Serial No Date last used Look for the serial number any inta e Refer to the battery s serial number Fy 76400300 wean 93 09 21 2011 label and look for the battery s serial c54406dc m 98 09 30 2011 number on the battery history screen gt You can check the respective battery pack s remaining capacity and the date when it was last used Delete info Remaining capacity Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information 1 Select Delete info e Follow step 2 on page 345 to select Delete info then press lt gt 2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted Select the battery pack information to be deleted then press lt G1 gt gt lt vV gt will appear e To delete in
150. d AF point lt e gt covers a smaller area to P222ega2228 focus Effective for pinpoint focusing of ee ee ste sss Overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage Since Spot AF covers a very small area focusing may be difficult during hand held shooting or for a moving subject Single point AF Manual selection Select one AF point lt gt to be used for focusing o o o o O0 0 O O0 O O O o o o o o o Q oF O o o o o o o o Go oOo o O0 o soe o a o o o oo oOo O O o AF point expansion Manual selection 5 The manually selected AF point lt gt and adjacent AF points lt o gt above below on the left and on the right are used to focus Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point With Al Servo AF the manually selected AF point lt L gt must focus track the subject first However it is easier to focus the target subject than with Zone AF With One Shot AF when focus is achieved with an expanded AF point the expanded AF point lt gt will also be displayed along with the manually selected AF point lt L gt GIO 19 AF Area Selection Modes AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points The manually selected AF point lt gt and adjacent AF points lt gt are used to focus The AF point expansion is larger than with AF p
151. d to make automatic corrections Cy Off No automatic correction will be applied RS VIVID The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens nanat fortoner coir adinen capped o o automatic color adjustments are applied The printing characteristics are the same as the Natural setting However this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with Natural The printing will differ depending on the printer For details P9 Default refer to the printer s instruction manual When you change the printing effects it is reflected in the image displayed on the upper left Note that the printed image may look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation This also applies to Brightness and Adjust levels on page 308 GD If the shooting information of an image shot at the H1 or H2 ISO speed is imprinted the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted 306 6 Printing FON Set the date and file number a Pe Both imprinting fas ae Set if necessary 4 9x13cm Paper settings Select lt gt then press lt gt F Photo Cancel Set as desired then press lt 1 gt E Borderless Print Se on 6 Set the number of copies ate Pe o both e Set if necessary ee CE Select lt gt then press lt 1 gt Trimming aA Mnara Set the number of copies then press E Photo Cancel lt E gt E Borderless Print Ai baa on 7 S
152. d to the charger and insert the plug into the power outlet gt Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange Charge Level Silalge Lamp Color Indicator 0 49 Blinks once per second 50 74 Orange Blinks twice per second 75 or higher Blinks three times per second Fully charged Lights up It takes approx 2 5 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at 23 C 73 F The time required to recharge the battery depends on the ambient temperature and the battery s charge level e For safety reasons recharging in low temperatures 5 C 10 C 41 F 50 F will take longer up to 4 hours 28 Charging the Battery Vly QD sy Tips for Using the Battery and Charger Upon purchase the battery is not fully charged Recharge the battery before using Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used Even during storage a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity After recharging the battery detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet You can attach the cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery has been recharged or not If the battery has been recharged attach the La cover so that the battery shaped hole lt L gt is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery If the battery is exhausted attach the cover in the opposite orientation When not usin
153. de many functions such the AF mode and metering mode are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots The functions you can set are limited With lt P gt mode only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically You can freely set the AF mode metering mode and other B functions p 352 About Program Shift Inthe Program AE mode you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture combination Program set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure This is called Program shift e To shift the program press the shutter button down halfway then turn the lt gt dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed e Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken e Program shift cannot be used with flash 163 Tv Shutter Priority AE ma In this mode you set the shutter soeed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure suiting the brightness of the subject This is called shutter priority AE A faster shutter speed can freeze the action or a moving subject A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect giving the impression of motion lt Tv gt stands for Time value gt a fake Frozen action Slow shutter speed 1 30 sec Fast shutter speed 1 2000 sec 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt 2 Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt s gt dial Focus th
154. ditions At 1 500 sec or faster shutter speed and at the maximum aperture varies depending on the lens The continuous shooting speed may be slower depending on the shutter speed aperture subject conditions brightness lens type flash use etc With the AF mode set to One Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when using the following lenses EF300mm f 4L IS USM EF28 135mm f 3 5 5 6 IS USM EF75 300mm f 4 5 6 IS USM EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM Using the Self timer manus Use the self timer when you want to be in the picture 1 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 46 2 Select the self timer While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial to select the self timer z 10 sec self timer 72 2 sec self timer Take the picture Look through the viewfinder focus the subject then press the shutter button completely You can check the self timer operation with the self timer lamp beeper and countdown display in seconds on the LCD panel Two seconds before the picture is taken the self timer lamp will stay on and the beeper will sound faster 115 Using the Self timer Doo O GD If you will not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button attach the eyepiece cover p 187 If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken it may throw off the exposure F The lt j 2 gt enables you to shoot while not touching
155. ds AF Microadjustment a Select Adjust by lens EF24 105mm f 4L 1S USM Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Adjust Adjust focus for each model of lens individually by lens Disable Allby same amount 0 Adjust by lens W 0 1 20 IHF Register FI Clear all AF Microadjustment AF 2 Press the lt INFO gt button OOJEF24 105mm f 4L 15 USM gt The Adjust by lens screen will appear Review edit lens information Check and change the lens information 00JEF24 105mm f 4 IS USM A Check the lens information 1234567890 e Press the lt INFO gt button The screen will show the lens name and a 10 Cancel digit serial number When the serial number is displayed select OK and go to step 4 Ifthe lens serial number cannot be confirmed 0000000000 will be displayed Enter the number as indicated below See the next page about the asterisk displayed in front of the lens serial number 108 ta Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus E Review edit lens information Enter the serial number e Turn the lt gt dial to select the digit OOJEF24 105mm f 4L 15 USM then press lt gt to display lt Ci gt 000000000 Turn the lt gt dial to enter the z number then press lt gt oe e After entering all the digits turn the lt z gt dial to select OK then press lt G1 gt About the Lens Serial Number in step 3 if appears in front of the 10 digit le
156. e You can select Live mode p 209 Live mode p 210 or Quick mode p 214 e Grid display By displaying a 3x3 or 6x4 grid you can check for any picture tilting Also with 3x3 diag gt the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the intersections over the subject for better balance in the composition 205 t Menu Function Settings E e Aspect ratio The image s aspect ratio can be set to 3 2 4 3 16 9 or 1 1 The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when the following aspect ratios are set 4 3 16 9 1 1 JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio RAW images will always be saved with the 3 2 aspect ratio Since the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image the image can be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the provided software When 3 Add cropping information is not set to Off the aspect ratio will be 3 2 The aspect ratio cannot be changed Image a Ratio and Pixel Count e Quality 3 2 e 22 1 megapixels 19 7 megapixels 18 7 megapixels 14 7 megapixels M ioa megapneis 07 megapneis 3 megaphets 6 6 meeapets 9 8 megapixels 8 7 megapixels 8 3 megapixels 6 6 megapixels 10 5 megapixels 9 3 megapixels 8 8 megapixels 7 0 megapixels 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1624 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 mega
157. e information from the output QD e If the HDMI movie is output without information the card s remaining capacity battery level internal temperature increase p 247 and other indicators will not appear on the HDMI output screen Be aware of this if No mirroring is set If Mirroring is set you can check these indicators on the LCD monitor When you are not shooting movies the power will turn off automatically in accordance with the auto power off time If you are recording the HDMI output image to an external recording device setting 2 Auto power off to Disable p 55 is recommended e Audio is not output during HDMI output e Even if Mirroring is set no image will be displayed through the HDMI output when a movie is played back or menu is displayed When you stop movie shooting the HDMI output image will pause frame stop while the movie is being recorded to the card After the recording is completed the image will be displayed normally Simultaneous output from both HDMI and A V OUT is not possible The movie will be output to the cable that was connected to the terminal last During A V OUT output nothing will be displayed on the LCD monitor e The brightness of a movie shot by the camera and that of a recorded HDMI output image on the external recording device may differ depending on the viewing environment 245 t Menu Function Settings SSS ee F e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can chan
158. e lt Q gt button and the Quick Control screen will turn off 263 QJ Quick Control During Playback SSS Q To rotate an image set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 If Y 1 Auto rotate is set to On or Off the Rotate image setting will be recorded to the image but the camera will not rotate the image for display E e Pressing the lt Q gt button during the index display will switch to the single image display and the Quick Control screen will appear Pressing the lt Q gt button again will return to the index display e For images taken with another camera selectable functions may be limited 264 gt Enjoying Movies m You can play back movies in the following three ways Playback ona TV set p 274 277 Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately to connect the camera to a TV set Then you can play back captured movies and still photos on the TV If you have a High Definition TV set and connect your camera with an HDMI cable you can watch Full High Definition Full HD 1920x1080 and High Definition HD 1280x720 movies with higher image quality GD e Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV files Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN terminal the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable e Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable movies and still photos can
159. e AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function Convenient when you want to lock the focus during Al Servo AF AFe Switch to registered AF function After setting AF area selection mode p 72 Tracking sensitivity p 92 Acceleration deceleration tracking p 93 AF point auto switching p 94 Al Servo 1st image priority p 96 and Al Servo 2nd image priority p 97 and assigning this function to a button you can apply these settings while you hold down the assigned button for AF Convenient when you want to change the AF characteristics during Al Servo AF 2 In step 3 on page 327 if you press the lt INFO gt Switch to regktered AF fine button the Switch to registered AF func setting screen will appear Turn the lt 3 gt or lt s gt dial to select the parameter to be registered then press lt gt to append a checkmark lt v gt When you AF pt auto switching r select a parameter and press lt gt you can set Servo T t ime priority oie the parameter Servo 2nd img priority ry By pressing the lt 1T gt button you can revert the EB Default set MENUT settings to their defaults AF area selection mode o LJ lt Tracking sensitivity oo Accel decel tracking amp o a ouster gt ONE SHOT Al SERVO You can switch the AF mode In One Shot AF mode when you hold down the button to which this function is assigned the camera switches to Al Servo AF mode In the Al
160. e Battery Pack LP E6 Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated voltage 7 2VDC Battery capacity 1800 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 38 4 x 21 0 x 56 8 mm 1 5 x 0 8 x 2 2 in Weight Approx 80 g 2 8 oz 385 Specifications SS ns e Battery Charger LC E6 Compatible battery Recharging time Rated input Rated output Working temperature range Working humidity Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N Approx 2 hr 30 min 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 8 4VDC 1 2A 5 C 40 C 41 104 F 85 or less Dimensions W x H x D Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Weight Approx 130 g 4 6 oz e Battery Charger LC E6E Compatible battery Power cord length Recharging time Rated input Rated output Working temperature range Working humidity Dimensions W x H x D Weight Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N Approx 1 m 3 3 ft Approx 2 hours 30 min 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 8 4 V DC 1 2A 5 C 40 C 41 F 104 F 85 or less Approx 69 0 x 33 0 x 93 0 mm 2 7 x 1 3 x 3 7 in Approx 125 g 4 4 oz excluding power cord e EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM Angle of view Lens construction Minimum aperture Closest focusing distance Max magnification Field of view Image Stabilizer Filter size Lens cap Max diameter x length Weight Hood Case 386 Diagonal extent 84 23 20 Horizontal extent 74 19 20 Vertical extent 53 13 18 eleme
161. e Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images However in case visible dust still remains you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 to erase the dust spots automatically Preparation e Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and set the focus to infinity If the lens has no distance scale look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way Obtain the Dust Delete Data Select Dust Delete Data Picture Style Auto e Under the 63 tab select Dust Long exp noise reduction e erTi Delete Data then press lt gt Highlight tone priority Dust Delete Data Dust Delete Data 2 Select OK Obtain data for removing Select OK and press lt gt After dust using software the automatic self cleaning of the Refer to manual for details i sensor is performed a message will EEES OS appear Although there will be a i Cancel OK shutter sound during the cleaning no picture is taken Dust Delete Data ka Fully press the shutter button when ready Sensor cleaning 297 ma Appending Dust Delete Data SSS SSS El 3 Photograph a solid white object e Ata distance of 20 cm 30 cm 0 7
162. e Turn the lt gt dial to select a Versatile multi purpose gt aig parameter then press lt gt pi When Tracking sensitivity is selected Accel decel tracking amp a a the setting screen will appear MED Help OMFG e oO x A Make the adjustment r lt e Turn the lt gt dial to adjust as Versatile multi purpose desired then press lt gt setting i f The adjustment is saved Accel decel tracking a u e The default setting is indicated by the UmHep i light gray 9 mark 5 Exit the setting To return to the screen in step 1 press the lt RATE gt button Fl In step 2 pressing the lt 7 gt button will reset the respective case s three parameters to their default settings e You can also register the 1 2 and 3 parameter settings to My Menu p 337 Doing so will change the selected case s settings When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted select the adjusted case and then take the picture 95 mW Customizing AF Functions mam oF Q x With the AF 2 to AF5 menu tabs you RI A can set the AF functions to suit your Al Servo 2nd image priority shooting style or subject Al Servo 1st image priority AF2 Al Servo Al Servo 1st image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing for the first shot during continuous shooting with Al Servo AF Al servo 1st image priority o Equal priority Equal
163. e any of the following AEB white balance bracketing multiple exposures bulb exposure or movie shooting e Flash will not fire during HDR shooting 175 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting E About Effects e Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow detail would otherwise be lost e Art standard While the highlight and shadow detail will be better preserved than with Natural the contrast will be lower and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting The subject outlines will have bright or dark edges e Art vivid The colors are more saturated than with Art standard and the low contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect e Art bold The colors are the most saturated making the subject pop out and the picture look like an oil painting e Art embossed The color saturation brightness contrast and gradation are decreased to make the picture look flat The picture looks faded and old The subject outlines will have bright or dark edges Standard Higher Brightness Standard Standard Standard F Each effect will be applied while based on the characteristics of the Picture Style currently set 176 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting EE HDR Mode 5 Set Continuous HDR Select either 1 shot only or Every Continuous HDR 1 shot only shot then press lt 6 gt Every shat e With 1 shot only HDR shooting will be canceled
164. e balance may also change e If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting the movie may flicker e Zooming the lens during movie shooting is not recommended Zooming the lens can cause changes in the exposure regardless of whether the lens maximum aperture changes or not Exposure changes may be recorded as a result e Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 247 and 248 e If necessary also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages 217 and 218 F e Movie related settings are under the 434 and 65 tabs p 243 In the lt 45 gt mode they are under the 432 and 433 tabs e A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie If the file size exceeds 4 GB a new file will be created e The movie image s field of view is approx 100 with movie recording size set to hg e You can also focus the image by pressing the lt AF ON gt button To focus during movie shooting press the lt AF ON gt button You cannot focus by pressing the shutter button Under 485 Movie shoot btn if 89 is selected you can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie shooting p 244 e Monaural sound is recorded by the camera s built in microphone p 220 e By connecting a stereo microphone commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 19 stereo sound recording is possible 228 Shooting Movies E S Notes on M
165. e effect Auto ISO cannot be set If you use this function in the lt M gt mode you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture Tv Shutter speed setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the shutter speed with the lt amp gt Or lt gt dial Av Aperture setting in M mode In manual exposure lt M gt you can set the aperture with the lt gt or lt gt dial 333 4 2 Custom Controls Rw One touch image quality setting When you press the button assigned to this function you can switch to the image recording quality set here While the camera switches the image recording quality the image recording quality will blink on the LCD panel After the shooting ends the One touch image quality setting will be canceled and the camera will switch back to the previous image recording quality 5 In step 3 on page 327 if you press the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function to switch to raw One touch image quality hold When you press the button assigned to this function you can switch to the image recording quality set here While the camera switches the image recording quality the image recording quality will blink on the LCD panel Even after shooting the One touch image quality setting will not be canceled To revert to the previous image recording quality setting press the button assign
166. e operations will disappear and the screen before you previous screen pressed the lt T gt button will reappear Deletes the last image you shot shoot another image The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1 W Undo last image If Save source imgs All images is set all of the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure image will be saved before exiting If Save source imgs Result only is set only the merged multiple exposure image will be saved before exiting Save and exit R Exit without None of the images will be saved before exiting saving GD During multiple exposure shooting you can only play back multiple exposure images 184 Multiple Exposures gt FAQ Are there any restrictions on the image recording quality All JPEG image recording quality settings can be selected If M or S is set the merged multiple exposure will be a image ery ojo jm TE aM JPEG GW JPEG IM JPEG M G0 S AM JPEG M G0 S GW JPEG GW JPEG e Can I merge images recorded in the card With Select image for multi expo you can select the first single exposure from the images recorded on the card p 183 Note that you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card ans R e Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting With On Func Ctrl set you can shoot multiple exposures with Live View shooting p 199 Note that 4 Aspect ratio will
167. e problem Time code is off Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and time code When you want to edit a movie using time code it is recommended not to shoot still photos during movie shooting 371 Troubleshooting Guide SSS nal The time code cannot be appended during HDMI output e Ifthe movie recording quality s frame rate setting is set to a value that does not function properly in combination with the NTSC PAL frame rate the time code will not be appended to the HDMI output image The HDMI output image has a temporary frame stop When the movie shooting ends the HDMI output image pauses frame stop When writing to the card is completed the movie is output normally Movie shooting stops if connect or disconnect the HDMI cable e If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting the movie shooting will stop Operation Problems cannot change the setting with lt gt lt 62 gt or lt 45 gt Set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left lock release p 47 Check the 4 2 Multi function lock setting p 325 The camera button dial s function has changed Check the 4 2 Custom Controls setting p 327 Display Problems The menu screen shows few tabs and options Inthe lt G j gt mode only certain menu tabs and options are displayed Set the shooting mode to lt P Tv Av M B gt p 51 372 T
168. e subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The aperture is set automatically A Check the viewfinder display and shoot e As long as the aperture is not blinking a standard exposure will be obtained V4 3112111101111123 SO EDEN a i L rt Li 164 Tv Shutter Priority AE e Ifthe maximum aperture blinks it indicates underexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed Ifthe minimum aperture blinks it indicates overexposure Turn the lt gt dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed F Shutter Speed Display The shutter speeds from 8000 to 4 indicate the denominator of the fractional shutter speed For example 125 indicates 1 125 sec Also 0 5 indicates 0 5 sec and 15 is 15 sec 165 Av Aperture Priority AE mae In this mode you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter soeed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the subject brightness This is called aperture priority AE A higher f number smaller aperture hole will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus On the other hand a lower f number larger aperture hole will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus lt Av gt stands for Aperture value aperture opening WSN Wf 42 0 1
169. e the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover Insert the battery e Insert the end with the battery contacts Insert the battery until it locks in place Close the cover e Press the cover until it snaps shut QD Only Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N can be used Removing the Battery Open the cover and remove the battery Press the battery release lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts be sure to attach the protective cover provided p 29 to the battery 30 Installing and Removing the Card mau The camera can use a CF card and SD card Images can be recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera If a card is inserted in both slots you can select which card to record images to or record the same images simultaneously on both cards p 118 120 Q If you use an SD card be sure the card s write protect switch B is set upward to enable writing erasing Installing the Card Open the cover Slide the cover as shown by the arrow to open it 2 Insert the card e The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card Face the CF card s label side toward you and insert the end with the small holes into the camera If the card is inserted in the wrong way it may damage the camera The CF card eject button will stick
170. e will play frame by frame If you hold down lt G1 gt it will fast forward the movie Displays the movie s last frame Displays the editing screen p 269 Playback position Playback time minutes seconds with Movie play count Rec time set Time code hours minutes seconds frames with Movie play count Time code set You can adjust the built in soeaker s p 267 volume by turning the lt s gt dial F e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 the continuous playback time at 23 C 73 F will be as follows approx 3 hr 30 min e By connecting commercially available headphones equipped with a 3 5 mm stereo mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the movie s sound p 237 e f you connect the camera to a TV set p 274 277 to play back a movie adjust the sound volume with the TV set Turning the lt gt dial will not adjust the sound volume e f you took a still photo while you shot the movie the movie image displayed will look still for approx 1 sec 268 X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes m You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1 sec increments mo 1 On the movie playback screen select X ae gt The movie editing panel will be T Se displayed at the bottom of the screen E 5 I gt a dil L E Specify the part to be edited out Select either 4 Cut beginning or Eg Cut end then press lt gt Tilt lt
171. ect 3 Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed Turn the lt gt dial to select lt e then OK Cancel press lt E gt When the daylight saving time is set to lt the time set in step 4 will advance by 1 hour If is set the daylight saving time will be canceled and the time will go back by 1 hour mmidd yy a gt 3 New York Date Time Zone 6 Exit the setting 01 11 2012 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select OK 01 11 2012 15 30 00 then press lt gt mm dd yy gt The Date Time Zone will be set and 3 New York the menu will reappear OK Cancel Fl e The menu setting procedure is explained on pages 51 52 The date time that was set will start from when you press lt gt in step 6 e In step 3 the time displayed on the upper right is the time difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time UTC If you do not see your time zone set the time zone while referring to the difference with UTC 3 Mam Selecting the Interface Language mum Display the menu screen e Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen 2 Under the 2 tab select Language e Press the lt Q gt button and select the tab Turn the lt gt dial to select the 2 tab e Turn the lt gt dial to select Language the fourth item from the top then press lt 1 gt Date Time Zone 01 11 Languages Enc En
172. ect on the cord Also do not twist or tie the cords e Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet e Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged e Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet with a dry cloth If the surrounding is dusty humid or oily the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short circuit the outlet causing a fire e Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car s cigarette lighter outlet The battery may leak generate excessive heat or explode causing a fire burns or injuries e A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the product is used by children Supervise children while they are using the product Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury e Do not leave a lens or lens attached camera in the sun without the lens cap attached Otherwise the lens may concentrate the sun s rays and cause a fire e Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth Doing so may trap heat within and cause the casing to deform or catch fire e Be careful not to get the camera wet If you drop the product in the water or if water or metal get inside the product promptly remove the battery This is to prevent a fire and an electrical shock e Do not use paint thinner benzene or other organic solvents to clean the product Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard 390 Safe
173. ed select the 3 characters registered image size Settings F About User setting2 When you select the image size registered with User setting2 and take pictures the image recording quality character will be automatically appended as the file name s fourth character from the left The meaning of the image recording quality characters is as follows L AL dL M AM aM MEM E 4 S1 a S1 S a S2 exes ie 3 When the image is transferred to a personal computer the automatically appended fourth character will be included You can then see the image size without having to open the image RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with the extension 13 3 Q The first character cannot be an underscore E e The extension will be JPG for JPEG images CR2 for RAW images and MOV for movies When you shoot a movie with User setting2 the file name s fourth character will be an underscore _ 155 7219 File Numbering Methods m The four digit file number is like the frame number on a roll of film The captured images Ex BE3B0001 JPG are assigned a sequential file number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder You can change how the file number is assigned OA EMM o t 1 Select File numbering e Under the 1 tab select File eee ree Cornus numbering then press lt gt Auto reset Select the file numbering method e Turn the lt 3
174. ed since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subject s movement will look e f you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded Fl e If ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed When you press the lt gt button and then recompose the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 22 227 compared to when you first press the lt gt button e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display the histogram 226 Shooting Movies a Information Display e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the information display will change AF mode Picture Style ARD Live mode eA Face detection Live mode AAD Quick mode Time code AF point Live mode Auto Lighting Optimizer Shooting mode l Recording movie Drive mode White balance Se Eye Fi card Card for recording aa Live aii transmission playback Ess Bh status 00 00 00 Image recording AAM Rawe i k pec GPS connection quality aawer i a d TE ec indicator Movie recording size Mazo Do Fe 17 18 mT pe Magnification Recording level Manual J Fanaa eS laps ieat er J 2otlying position AE lock S EAL Battery check
175. ed to this function again 5 In step 3 on page 327 if you press the lt INFO gt button you can select the image recording quality for this function to switch to Image quality Press lt 1 gt to display the image recording quality setting screen p 121 on the LCD monitor 3 2 Picture Style Press lt amp 1 gt to display the Picture Style selection setting screen p 131 on the LCD monitor Fl During the switch to the One touch image quality setting lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder p 324 334 2 Custom Controls E Depth of field preview When you press the depth of field preview button the aperture will stop down and you can check the depth of field p 167 wy IS start With the lens IS switch set to lt ONS gt the lens Image Stabilizer operates when you press the button assigned to this function Q VF electronic level When you press the button assigned to this function the viewfinder will display a grid and an electronic level using the AF points oy oh a a E fel o g eB e a o gt e e 2 ie NOE ager gt Over 4 00000 ofp o o o o s o o ofelfel e o o EIS ooo 335 4 2 Custom Controls l MENU Menu display Pressing lt gt will display the menu on the LCD monitor gt Image playback Pressing lt gt will play back images Q Magnify Reduce press SET turn
176. eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 Installing and Removing the Card ce cecceceeeeee eee eteteeeeeeeeeneneneaes 31 Turning on the P OWN scssencssaciviss since teaniangatinarsdeatatanien iaectenecnamaniss 34 Setting the Date Time ANd ZONE cccccceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeas 36 Selecting the Interface LANQUaQe cecceeeeeeeeeeeeenettteeeeeeeeeeees 38 Attaching and Detaching a Lens ceeeececeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 39 About the Lens Image Stabilizer cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenes 42 Basic Operator siiis tebladdnntmeseniatelaxteasin 43 Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions cccccesseecseeesseeeeees 49 UI Menu Operations ccccccccssececseeecseeeesseeecseeeesseeeeseeessaeees 51 Betore You OlAM recsvevecccevhavacinarsctaunsameatanateideasaavedahcnaneecaaunmannseebnednas 53 Formatting Ne Cad sssciiisecr krenimo ann Ta Ran haaa 53 Setting the Power off Time Auto Power Off ceeeceeteeeeereees 55 Setting the Image Review Time ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenencteeeeeeees 55 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings 0008 56 Displaying the Grid and Electronic LeVel cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 59 Feature Guide cc cccsssssessessesseessesseessesstesteceesseeseesseeseeseees 61 Contents 2 Basic Shooting 63 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto 00 0 0 64 G Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent A
177. egistering and using an AF point 1 NO Fl o 330 Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following Single point Spot AF Single point AF AF point expansion manual selection surrounding points or 61 point automatic selection AF Zone AF cannot be registered Select an AF point manually p 74 Hold down the lt E J gt button and press the lt 8 gt button A beep will sound and the AF point will be registered If the AF area selection mode is not set to 61 point automatic selection AF the registered AF point will blink lf AF 4 Orientation linked AF point is set to Select separate AF points you can register the AF point separately for the vertical camera grip at top or bottom and horizontal orientations When you press the lt AF ON gt button assigned to this function or press the lt gt button the camera will switch to the manually selected AF point when you registered To cancel the registered AF point hold down the lt E J gt button and press the lt ISO amp 4 gt button The registered AF point will also be canceled if you select 4 Clear all camera settings When an AF point is registered the following will be displayed e 61 point automatic selection AF __ HP e Single point Spot AF Single point AF AF point expansion SEL Center SEL HP Off center When registered with SEL or SEL HP the registered AF point will blink 2 Custom Controls AOF AF stop Th
178. egrade You should stop the Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again e Ifthe camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt gt is displayed a red icon lt f gt will start blinking This blinking icon is a warning that the Live View shooting will soon end automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while e Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt M gt and lt i gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera e Ifthe camera s internal temperature is high the image quality of high ISO speed images or long exposures may be degraded even before the white icon lt M gt is displayed Shooting Result e If you take the picture in magnified view the exposure may not come out as desired Return to the normal view before taking the picture In magnified view the shutter soeed and aperture will be displayed in orange Even if you take the picture in magnified view the image will be captured in the normal view e If t422 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 is not set to Disable the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set 217 i Live View Shooting Cautions Live View Image e Under low or brig
179. el for 4 sec 4 e For the functions settable in each shooting mode see page 352 an Set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left P Program AE me The camera automatically sets the shutter soeed and aperture to suit the subject s brightness This is called Program AE lt P gt stands for Program AE stands for autoexposure LIAN 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt P gt Jel 2 Focus the subject Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject Then press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the focus confirmation light lt gt on the viewfinder s bottom right will light up In One Shot AF mode gt The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Ee i 3 Check the display a e A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture display do not blink Take the picture Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely 162 P Program AE e If the 30 shutter speed and the maximum aperture blink it indicates underexposure Increase the ISO speed or use flash If the 8000 shutter speed and the minimum aperture blink it indicates overexposure Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter sold separately to reduce the amount of light entering the lens Gil Differences Between lt P gt and lt E gt Modes In the lt 3 gt mo
180. eld Preview The aperture opening diaphragm changes only at the moment when the picture is taken Otherwise the aperture remains fully open Therefore when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor the depth of field will look narrow Press the depth of field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of field range of acceptable focus El e A higher f number will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus However the viewfinder will look darker e The depth of field effect can be clearly seen on the Live View image as you change the aperture and press the depth of field preview button p 200 e The exposure will be locked AE lock while the depth of field preview button is pressed 167 M Manual Exposure mau In this mode you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired To determine the exposure refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially available exposure meter This method is called manual exposure lt M gt stands for Manual 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt M gt 2 Set the ISO speed p 126 3 Set the shutter speed and aperture To set the shutter speed turn the lt gt dial To set the aperture turn the lt 3 gt dial If it cannot be set set the lt LOCK gt switch to the left then turn the lt gt or lt 3 gt dial Sta
181. elect Record File name Auto rotate ono func card folder sel then press Format card lt GE gt Record func card folder sel Select Record func Record func _ Standard Turn the lt 32 gt dial to select Record Record play i sales N func then press lt gt E Record func card folder sel Select the recording method Record func standard e Turn the lt gt dial to select the Auto switch card Rac ar recording method then press lt gt Rec to multiple a H iL MENIU fe 118 M9 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback SS eee e Standard Images will be recorded to the card selected with Record play e Auto switch card Same as with the Standard setting but if the card becomes full the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record images When the camera switches to the other card a new folder will be created automatically e Rec separately You can set the image recording quality for each card p 121 Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the image recording quality you have set You can freely set the image recording quality to ML and AW S3 and M EM etc e Rec to multiple Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously at the same image size You can also select RAW JPEG when Rec separately is set the maximum burst will decrease greatly p 123 E When Rec separately or Rec to multiple is se
182. elect controls that are v Quick Control Dial deactivated when the Multi controller gt multi function bock switch is set to LOCK with s i This can help prevent oK accidentally changing E Help Cancel 61 Basic Shooting This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial s lt 5 gt Scene Intelligent Auto mode for easy picture taking In the lt f gt mode all you do is point and shoot and the camera sets everything automatically p 352 Also to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations major shooting settings cannot be changed Q aS Scene Intelligent Auto Fil About the Auto Lighting Optimizer In the lt 43 gt mode the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast It is also enabled by default in the P Tv Av B modes AF Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto mm lt 4J gt is a fully automatic mode The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically Detecting whether the subject is still or moving it also adjusts focus automatically Y Set the Mode Dial to lt G gt j e Turn the Mode Dial while holding JA down the lock release button at the center Area AF frame 2 Aim the Area AF frame over the target subject e Allthe AF points will be used to focus and generally the closest object will be focused Aiming the center of the Area AF
183. els Dead pixels displaying only black or red etc are not a malfunction They do not affect the images recorded e If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period screen burn in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed However this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days In low or high temperatures the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it may look black It will return to normal at room temperature Cards To protect the card and its recorded data note the following e Do not drop bend or wet the card Do not subject it to excessive force physical shock or vibration e Do not touch the card s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything metallic e Do not store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set speakers or magnet Also avoid places prone to having static electricity e Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source Store the card in a case e Do not store the card in hot dusty or humid locations Lens After detaching the lens from the camera attach the lens caps and put down the lens with the rear end up to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts Contacts Cautions During Prolonged Use If you use continuous shooting Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period the camera may become hot Although this is not a malfunction holding the
184. enever you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor Normally you need not pay attention to this operation However you can choose to perform sensor cleaning at any time or disable it Cleaning the Sensor Now Select Sensor cleaning Video system e Under the 3 tab select Sensor _ Battery info cleaning then press lt gt Sensor cleaning button display options EE btn function Rating Sensor cleaning 2 Select Clean now tc Auto cleaning e Select Clean now c then press Clean now E Clean manually lt As Select OK on the dialog screen then press lt gt gt The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned Although there will be a shutter sound during the cleaning a picture is not taken Fl e For best results perform the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is placed on a table or other flat surface e Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning the result will not improve much Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished the Clean now c option will remain disabled temporarily Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning In step 2 select Auto cleaning t and set it to Disable gt The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to lt ON gt or lt OFF gt 296 mM Appending Dust Delete Data mam Normally th
185. essed The exposure will be locked AE lock while you press the shutter button QD If you assign AE lock while button pressed to the shutter button any buttons assigned to AE lock or AE lock hold will also work as AE lock while button pressed F If you change the aperture in lt M gt mode when AF point direct selection is set turn the lt gt dial while holding down the lt gt button 332 2 Custom Controls uy AE lock hold When you press the button assigned to this function you can lock the exposure AE lock The AE lock will be maintained until you press the button again Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting FEL FE lock During flash photography pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and record the required flash output FE lock S0 Set ISO speed hold button turn gt You can set the ISO speed by holding down lt gt and turning the lt gt dial If Auto ISO is set manual ISO speed setting will take effect Auto ISO cannot be set If you use this function in the lt M gt mode you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture ISO Set ISO speed during metering During metering you can set the ISO speed by turning the lt gt dial If Auto ISO is set manual ISO speed setting will tak
186. etely F e Inthe P Tv Av M B modes pressing the lt AF ON gt button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter button halfway e f you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture e Even during menu display image playback or image recording you can instantly go back to shooting ready by pressing the shutter button halfway 44 Basic Operation Mode Dial Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial 1 After pressing a button turn the lt s7 gt dial When you press a button such as lt WB gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt ISO 84 gt the respective function remains selected for 6 seconds 6 During this time you can turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting When the function selection ends or if you press the shutter button halfway the camera will be ready to shoot e Use this dial to select or set the metering mode AF mode ISO speed AF point etc 2 Turn the lt gt dial only While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt gt dial to set the desired setting e Use this dial to set the shutter speed aperture etc Fl The operations in 1 are also possible while the lt LOCKB gt switch is set to
187. etering mode flash Custom Function is set to TTL autoflash the flash will always be fired at full output p 198 Flash exposure compensation cannot be set e lf flash exposure compensation has already been set with the Speedlite flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera When the Speedlite s flash exposure compensation is canceled set to 0 flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera High speed sync cannot be set in the lt Av gt mode Under 1 External Speedlite control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to Auto p 194 The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View shooting e If you use flash the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot p 201 During Live View and movie shooting a white or red icon is displayed e Itindicates that the camera s internal temperature is high If the white lt 0 gt icon displayed the still photo s image quality may deteriorate If the red lt i gt icon is displayed it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically p 217 247 369 Troubleshooting Guide Movie shooting terminates by itself e Ifthe card s writing speed is slow movie shooting may stop automatically When the compression method is set to IPB use a CF card with a reading writing speed of at least 10 MB per sec and a SD card with a reading writing speed of at least 6 MB per sec When the compressi
188. etter results p 93 e Ifthe subject moves erratically up down left or right setting AF pt auto switching to 2 may give better results p 94 91 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SSS SSS SS SSS SSS SSS About the Parameters e Tracking sensitivity Tracking sensiiuity Sets the subject tracking sensitivity during Al Servo AF when an obstacle enters the AF points or when the AF points stray from the subject A Case 7 Locked on Responsive i Help SET als 0 Standard setting suited for most moving subjects Locked on 2 Locked on 1 The camera will try to continue focusing the subject even if an obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points The 2 setting makes the camera track the target subject longer than with the 1 setting However if the camera focuses the wrong subject it may take slightly longer to switch and focus the target subject Responsive 2 Responsive 1 Once an AF point tracks a subject the camera can focus consecutive subjects at different distances Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject The 2 setting makes it quicker to focus the next consecutive subject than with 1 However the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong subject F Tracking sensitivity is the feature named Al Servo tracking sensitivity in the EOS 1D Mark III IV EOS 1Ds Mark III and EOS 7D 92 tM Selecting Al Ser
189. exposure shooting of a moving subject Continuous shooting is possible but the following operations are disabled during shooting menu viewing Live View display image review after image capture image playback and undo last image p 184 Also only the multiple exposure image will be saved The single exposures merged in the multiple exposure image will not be saved WD e If you set white balance bracketing the HDR mode or if you shoot a movie multiple exposure shooting cannot be set e f you perform Live View shooting while On ContShtng is set the Live View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken From the second shot onward shoot while looking through the viewfinder 179 Multiple Exposures Multiple exposure Set Multi expos ctrl o Select the desired multiple exposure Multi expos ctrl Additive POE control method then press lt 6 gt Bright Dark e Additive The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively Based on the No of exposures set a negative exposure compensation Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure compensation Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures Two exposures 1 stop three exposures 1 5 stop four exposures 2 stops 4p If On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the image displayed during shooting may look noisy However when you finish shooting the set number of exposures noise reduction will be a
190. formation for another battery pack repeat this procedure 3 Press the lt 7 gt button gt The confirmation dialog will appear A Select OK e Select OK then press lt gt The battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in step 1 will reappear 347 Using a Household Power Outlet mm With the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining battery level Connect the DC Coupler s plug Connect the DC Coupler s plug to the AC Adapter s socket 2 Connect the power cord Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration e After using the camera unplug the power plug from the power outlet Place the cord in the groove Insert the DC Coupler s cord carefully without damaging the cord A Insert the DC Coupler Open the battery compartment cover and open the DC Coupler cord hole cover Insert the DC Coupler securely until it locks and put the cord through the hole Close the cover oD Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the camera s power switch is set to lt ON gt 348 Replacing the Date Time Battery mau The date time backup battery maintains the camera s date and time lts service life is approx 5 years If the date time is reset when camera is turned on follow the procedure below to replace the backup battery w
191. fume Live View shoot Enable e Turn the lt gt dial to select the item AF mode Live mode hen or lt gt Grid display Off we Dee v a x A Select the setting Severe e Turn the lt gt dial to select the Live mode desired setting E Live mode Quick mode e The current setting is indicated in blue Oo 5 Set the desired setting EE SHOKIT A LY func Live View shoot Enable e Press lt gt to set it AF mode t Live mode Grid display off 6 Exit the setting hen ee fe e Press the lt MENU gt button to exit the Silent LV shoot Mode 1 menu and return to shooting ready Metering timer 16 sec Fl e The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen e You can also use lt 4 gt to set menu settings Except P gt 1 Erase images and 1 Format card e To cancel press the lt MENU gt button e For details about each menu item see page 354 52 Before You Start memm tM Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer format the card with the camera q When the card is formatted all images and data in the card will be erased As even protected images will be erased make sure there is nothing you need to keep If necessary transfer the images to a personal computer etc before formatting the card O a mo x 1 Select Format card e Under the 1 tab selec
192. g approx 6 2 of viewfinder at center Spot metering approx 1 5 of viewfinder at center Center weighted average metering EV 1 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Program AE Scene Intelligent Auto Program Shutter priority AE Aperture priority AE Manual exposure Bulb exposure Scene Intelligent Auto ISO 100 12800 set automatically P Tv Av M B Auto ISO ISO 100 25600 in 1 3 or whole stop increments or ISO expansion to L 50 H1 equivalent to ISO 51200 H2 equivalent to ISO 102400 ISO speed range Auto ISO range and Auto ISO minimum shutter speed settable Manual 5 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments AEB 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments Can be combined with manual exposure compensation Auto Applied in One Shot AF mode with evaluative metering when focus is achieved Manual By AE lock button Auto 1 EV 2 EV 3 EV Natural Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed Possible Function control priority Continuous shooting priority 2 to 9 exposures Additive Average Bright Dark Specifications e Shutter Type Electronically controlled focal plane shutter Shutter speeds 1 8000 sec to 30 sec bulb Total shutter speed range Available range varies by shooting mode X sync at 1 200 sec e Drive System Drive modes Single shooting High speed continuous shooting Low speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting Silent continuous shoot
193. g displayed at the suitable brightness due to low or bright light conditions However the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting e If flash is used or bulb is set the lt E gt icon and histogram will be grayed out for your reference The histogram may not be properly displayed in low or bright light conditions 202 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor a sa ain Final Image Simulation The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc in the Live View image so you can see what the captured image will look like During shooting the Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below Final image simulation during Live View shooting e Picture Style All parameters such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone are reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure with Expo simulation Enable Depth of field with depth of field preview button ON Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral illumination correction Highlight tone priority Aspect ratio image area confirmation 203 Shooting Function Settings sxe ISO 4 AF DRIVE WB EE 343 Settings While the Live View image is displayed if you press the lt ISO 4 gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt WB gt lt E gt or lt E4 gt button the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt g gt or lt gt dial to set the
194. g you cannot use the functions dimmed in the camera menu If you connect the camera to a personal computer or printer multiple exposure shooting is not possible When On Func ctrl is set you can press the lt gt gt button to view the multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure p 184 You can also set multiple exposure with t483 Multiple exposure Multiple Exposures Merging multiple exposures with an image recorded in the card You can select an image recorded in the card as the first single exposure The original of the selected image will remain intact You can only select images You cannot select M W S or JPEG images REIT SSS 1 Select Select image for multi expo tiie oon oA Select Select image for multi ulti expos ctr Additive E A expo then press lt gt Save source imgs _ All images gt The images in the card will be displayed Continue Mult exp 1 shot only Select image for multi expo 2 Select an image Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be used as the first single exposure then press lt gt Turn the lt gt dial to select OK gt The file No of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of the screen 3 Take the picture When you select the first image the number of remaining exposures as set with No of exposures will decrease by 1 For example if No of exposures is 3 you can shoot two exposures
195. g erate Select Flash C Fn settings then TTL Il meter valuative Flash sync speed in Av mode ALTO press GE P Flash function settings Clear flash settings Flash C Fn settings Clear all Speedlite C Fn s Flash C Fn settings i Set the functions it e Turn the lt gt dial to select the 1 Feet ft number then press lt 6 gt e Turn the lt gt dial to select the menu option then press lt 6 gt Clearing Flash Custom Function Settings Selecting Clear all Speedlite C Fn s will clear all the Speedlite s Custom Function settings except C Fn 00 Distance indicator display WD With an EX series Speedlite if the Flash metering mode Custom Function is set to TTL autoflash the Speedlite will always fire at full output Fl The Speedlite s Personal Functions P Fn cannot be set or canceled with the camera s External Speedlite control screen Set it with the Speedlite 198 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the picture on the camera s LCD lt iT 3 monitor This is called Live View C shooting Live View shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Live View shooting is effective for photos of still subjects If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor camera shake can cause blurred images Using a tripod is recommended Fil Abou
196. g the camera remove the battery If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period a small amount of power current is released resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life Store the battery with the protective cover attached Storing the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery s performance The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50 60 Hz power source If necessary attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or region Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger Doing so can damage the battery charger If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged the battery has reached the end of its service life Check the battery s recharge performance p 344 and purchase a new battery e After disconnecting the charger s power plug do not touch the prongs for at least 10 sec e Ifthe battery s remaining capacity p 344 is 94 or higher the battery will not be recharged e The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N 29 Installing and Removing the Battery mum Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 or LP E6N into the camera The camera s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed and darkens when the battery is removed Installing the Battery Open the cover Slid
197. ge recording quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio The image will be cropped slightly ee Ratio and Pixel Count Quality 3840x2560 EEN 3840x2160 EEA 9 8 megapixels 8 7 megapixels 8 3 megapixels 6 6 megapixels 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1624 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 megapixels 3 7 megapixels 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 294 Sensor Cleaning The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit attached to the image sensor s front layer low pass filter to shake off dust automatically The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the image so that the dust spots remaining can be erased automatically by Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside in rare cases lubricant from the camera s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended F Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating you can press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start shooting immediately cr Automatic Sensor Cleaning m Wh
198. ge the information displayed on the screen e You can append a time code to the HDMI output image p 241 2 Menu Auto power off 1 min LCD brightness Auto Date Times Zone OVI 12 13 30 Language English VF grid display Disable GPS device settings HDMI frame rate AUTO e HDMI frame rate You can set the HDMI output frame rate to Auto 24p or 60i 50i When you record movie from the HDMI output to a commercially available external recording device set the frame rate to match the external recording device s frame rate Fl e Ifthe frame rate set manually is not compatible with the external recording device the frame rate will be set automatically e f Movie recording size is set to frame rate P4 when HDMI frame rate 60i is set 2 3 pulldown will be performed 246 GD Movie Shooting Cautions White lt M gt and Red lt f gt Internal Temperature Warning Icons e f the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or a high ambient temperature a white icon lt M gt will appear Even if you shoot a movie while this icon is displayed the movie s image quality will hardly be affected However if you shoot still photos the image quality of the still photos may degrade You should stop shooting still photos for a while and allow the camera to cool down e f the camera s internal temperature further increases while the white icon lt gt is displayed a red icon lt g
199. gish Norsk 3 Set the desired language E ETENA E e Turn the lt gt dial to select the Nederlands Eh nvk a minine language then press lt G gt Dansk PycceMA RCW i Portugu s Polski Spx gt The interface language will change Suomi e tina uty Italiano Magyar A YepaiHcbea 38 Attaching and Detaching a Lens mu The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses The camera cannot be used with EF S or EF M lenses Remove the caps e Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows 2 Attach the lens Align the red dots on the lens and camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt e lt AF gt stands for Autofocus e If itis set to lt MF gt manual focus autofocus will not operate A Remove the front lens cap wD e Do not look at the sun directly through any lens Doing so may cause loss of vision e Ifthe front part focusing ring of the lens rotates during autofocusing do not touch the rotating part 39 Attaching and Detaching a Lens EE Minimizing Dust When changing lenses do it quickly in a place with minimal dust e When storing the camera without a lens attached be sure to attach the body cap to the camera e Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it About Zooming To zoom turn the zoom ring on the lens
200. gt The area within the magnifying frame will be magnified e Each time you press the lt Q gt button the view will change as follows Approx Approx Normal i 5X 10x view l Focus manually While looking at the magnified image turn the lens focusing ring to focus Magnified area position e After achieving focus press the lt Q gt Magnification button to return to the normal view 5 Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 200 216 GD Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds noise dots of light banding etc may become noticeable Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image e f Live View shooting is used continuously for a long period the camera s internal temperature may rise degrading image quality Stop Live View shooting when not shooting images e f you shoot a long exposure while the camera s internal temperature is high image quality may be degraded Stop Live View shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again White lt gt and Red lt f gt Internal Temperature Warning e lf the camera s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or a high ambient temperature a white icon lt gt will appear If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed the image quality may d
201. gt dial to select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Continuous Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created Even after you replace the card create a folder or switch the target 9999 for the images saved This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to use continuous file numbering you should use a newly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Next sequential file number 156 t File Numbering Methods ae R Auto Reset The file numbering restarts from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created When you replace the card create a folder or switch the target card for the images saved This is convenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously the file numbering of the new images may continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001 use a ne
202. gt gt will be displayed Use lt gt to move the lt lt gt gt frame over the target face Using AF to Focus 2 Focus the subject e Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the face covered by the lt gt frame gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange e If aface cannot be detected the AF point lt L gt will be displayed and AF will be executed at the center 3 Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 200 Ww e If the focus is far off face detection will not be possible If the lens enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to lt AF gt turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus The face will then be detected and lt 1 gt will be displayed e An object other than a human face may be detected as a face e Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture too bright or too dark titled horizontally or diagonally or partially hidden e The lt gt focusing frame may cover only part of the face Fl e When you press lt gt straight down or press lt gt the AF mode will switch to the Live mode p 209 You can tilt lt gt to move the AF point Press lt gt straight down again or press lt gt to return to
203. gt p 32 e Metering mode gt p 169 Lens Drive e Attaching Detaching gt p 39 ad DIVE MOGE 2 pale e Self timer gt p 115 e Zoom gt p 40 e Maxi sth ge e Image Stabilizer gt p 42 R P Recording Images Basic Settings e Record func gt p 118 e Language gt p 38 eCreate select a folder gt p 152 e Date Time Zone gt p 36 e File name gt p 154 e Beeper gt p 354 se File No gt p 156 e Copyright information gt p 158 e Clear all camera settings gt p 56 Image Quality e Image recording quality gt p 121 Viewfinder e ISO speed gt p 126 Dioptric adjustment gt p 43 e Picture Style gt p 131 e Eyepiece cover gt p 187 e White balance gt p 139 e Grid display gt p 59 e Auto Lighting Optimizer gt p 144 e Electronic level gt p 59 e Noise reduction for high ISO speeds gt p 145 LCD Monitor e Noise reduction for long exposures gt p 146 e Brightness adjustment gt p 285 e Electronic level gt p 60 e Feature guide gt p 61 e Highlight tone priority gt p 148 e Peripheral illumination correction gt p 149 12 e Chromatic aberration correction e Color space Shooting e Shooting mode eHDR Multiple exposures e Mirror lockup e Depth of field preview e Remote control Quick Control Exposure Adjustment e Exposure compensation e AEB e AE lock e Safety shift Flash e External flash e External flash function settings e External Speedlite Custom Functions Live V
204. h Digital Photo Professional 292 cH Resize memm You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save itas a new image Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG L M S1 S2 images JPEG 3 and RAW images cannot be resized 1 Select Resize Resize e Under the 12 tab select Resize inbhe then press lt gt Slide show i image transfer gt The images will be displayed Image jump w a 2 Select an image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image you want to resize e f you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from the index display 3 Select the desired image size e Press lt 1 gt to display the image sizes Turn the lt gt dial to select the OE Anam gt desired image size then press lt gt M si 82 A Save the image Select OK to save the resized image Check the destination folder and ee ae image file number then select OK Cancel Ok e To resize another image repeat steps 2 to 4 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 293 ci Resize SSS ee SS el Resize Options According to Original Image Size Te Available Resize Settings Original Image Size About Image Sizes The image size displayed in step 3 on the preceding page such as M x has a 3 2 aspect ratio The image size according to aspect ratios is shown in the table below The asterisked ima
205. h JPEG images the correction is applied when the image is captured Standard is automatically set in the lt J gt mode JEA Select Auto Lighting Optimizer Expo comp AEB 321 9 1 2 3 e Under the 2 tab select Auto ISO speed settings i Iai E ON N gt Lighting Optimizer then press White balance AVE lt GE gt Custom White Balance Auto Lighting Optimizer 2 Select the setting Standard e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the D Gh S e desired setting then press lt gt INFO Disable during man expo 3 Take the picture The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary QD f t483 Highlight tone priority is set to Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable and the setting cannot be changed e Depending on the shooting conditions noise may increase e f a setting other than Disable is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure the image may still come out bright If you want a darker exposure set this to Disable e Ifthe HDR mode p 175 or multiple exposure shooting p 179 is set the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to Disable When the HDR mode or multiple exposure shooting is canceled the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to the original setting Fl In step 2 if you press the lt INFO gt button and uncheck lt v gt the Disable during man expo se
206. h the TV set The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera e Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television turn off the camera and TV set e Depending on the TV set part of the image displayed may be cut off Viewing on High Definition HD TV Sets HDMI Cable HTC 100 sold separately is required 1 Connect the HDMI cable to the camera e With the plug s lt 4 HDMI MINI gt logo facing the front of the camera insert it into the lt HDMI OUT gt terminal nom 2 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV T set O Connect the HDMI cable to the TV s HDMI IN port Turn on the TV and switch the TV s video input to select the connected port A Set the camera s power switch to lt ON gt 274 Viewing the Images on TV N 5 Press the lt gt gt button gt The image will appear on the TV screen Nothing will be displayed on the camera s LCD monitor e The images will automatically be displayed at the TV s optimum resolution e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can change the display format e To play back movies see page 267 4d The movie cannot be output at the same time from both the lt HDMI OUT gt and lt A V OUT gt terminals gI e Do not connect any other device s output to the camera s lt HDMI OUT gt terminal Doing so may cause a malfunction e Certain TVs may not be able to
207. harged Battery Pack LP E6 no Live View shooting and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e Possible shots with Battery Grip BG E11 e With LP E6 x 2 approx twice the shots without the battery grip e With size AA LR6 alkaline batteries at 23 C 73 F approx 270 shots F e The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations e Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period e Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture e Using the lens Image Stabilizer e Using the LCD monitor often e The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions e The lens operation is powered by the camera s battery Depending on the lens used the number of possible shots may be lower e For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting see page 201 See 3 Battery info to check the battery s condition in detail p 344 e f size AA LR6 batteries are used in Battery Grip BG E11 a four level indicator will be displayed 4 4_ 4 will not be displayed 35 Mam Setting the Date Time and Zone mam When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date time has been reset the Date Time Zone setting screen will appear Follow steps 3 to 6 to set the current date time and time zone Note that the date time appended to recorded images will be based on this date time setting Be sure to set the correct date
208. hat accel and suddenly HE erate or decelerate quickly E Effective for subjects having sudden i Tracking sensitivity SEa ee i Accel decel tracking a a movements sudden acceleration oy AF pt auto switching o o n i aiva erpa deceleration or sudden stops Default settings e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 0 F If the moving subject suddenly and greatly changes speed setting Accel decel tracking to 2 may give better results p 93 89 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SSS SSS SSS SS SS Case 5 For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction Oo AF H fF ba TET APLAR config tool Fal Case 5 k For erratic subjects moving HE quickly in any direction Tracking sensitivity SEa ee Accel decel tracking o o n LJ of AF pt auto switching o i a i Help FR Detail set Default settings e Tracking sensitivity 0 e Accel decel tracking 0 e AF pt auto switching 1 Even if the target subject moves dramatically up down left or right the AF point will switch automatically to focus track the subject Effective for shooting subjects that move dramatically up down left or right This setting takes effect when the following AF area selection modes are set AF point expansion Manual selection a AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 6
209. he lt gt button to start shooting a movie gt While the movie is being shot the mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen To stop shooting the movie press the lt T gt button again GD Regarding the cautions for movie shooting see page 228 220 Shooting Movies Shutter priority AE When the shooting mode is lt Tv gt you can manually set the shutter speed for movie shooting The ISO speed and aperture will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure Da i 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Tv gt Z Qf 2 Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Set the desired shutter speed While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt gt dial The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame 4 pee See p gii rate lt F gt Bo os Ina 1 4000 sec 1 30 sec 60 Iso 1 4000 sec 1 60 sec Focus and shoot the movie e The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 220 4D Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded When shooting a movie of a moving subject a shutter speed of 1 30 sec to 1 125 sec is recommended The faster the shutter speed the less smooth the subject s movement will look e f you change the shutter speed while shoo
210. hooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting Ifyou shoot a movie when 1 L 50 or 2 H1 51200 H2 102400 is set the ISO speed setting will switch to 1 ISO 100 or 2 H 25600 respectively during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting Fl Under 492 ISO speed settings you can use ISO speed range to expand the settable ISO speed range from ISO 50 L to ISO 102400 H2 p 128 e lt D gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when you set an expanded ISO speed L H1 or H2 p 324 ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to A Auto the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway As indicated below the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting Automatically set within ISO 100 12800 P Tv Av M Automatically set within ISO 100 25600 Fixed at ISO 400 With flash Fixed at ISO 400 1 2 3 1 The actual ISO speed range depends on the Minimum and Maximum settings set in Auto ISO range 2 If fill flash will result in overexposure ISO 100 or a higher ISO will be set 3 When using bounce flash with an external Speedlite in the lt J gt and lt P gt modes the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 400 1600 127 ISO Setting the ISO Speed OO ae uam Setting the
211. hooting mode and Sound recording setting 232 U Setting the Movie Recording Size mam Movie rec size With i 4 Movie rec size you can set 1920x1080 30fps 17 13 the movie s image size frame rate per LSND Aa a SS second and compression method The ae frame rate switches automatically depending on the 3 Video system setting maiale fao We Fe WAR RA hao Ca ee In the lt G gt mode these menu options are displayed under 32 e Image size h20 1920x1080 Full High Definition Full HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 h20 1280x720 High Definition HD recording quality The aspect ratio will be 16 9 640 640x480 Standard definition recording quality The aspect ratio will be 4 3 e Frame rate fos frames per second 30 69 For areas where the TV format is NTSC North America Japan Korea Mexico etc 25 f50 For areas where the TV format is PAL Europe Russia es China Australia etc 24 Mainly for motion pictures e Compression method IPB Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording Since the file size will be smaller than with ALL I you can shoot longer ALL I l only Compresses one frame at a time for recording Although the file size will be bigger than with IPB the movie will be more suited for editing 233 tE Setting the Movie Recording Size Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Movie Recording T
212. hot camera for a long period can cause slight skin burns 15 Quick Start Guide 1 Insert the battery p 30 amp To charge the battery see page 28 Insert a card p 31 e The camera front side slot is for a CF card and the camera back side slot is for an SD card gm Attach the lens p 39 Align it with the red dot Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 Set the power switch to lt ON gt p 34 16 Quick Start Guide While holding down the center of the Mode Dial set it to lt j gt Scene Intelligent Auto p 64 e All the necessary camera settings p will be set automatically Focus the subject p 44 Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject isa Lee a ate e Press the shutter button halfway ay Dee f WwW andthe camera will focus the 5 56 g gas subject Take the picture p 44 Press the shutter button completely to take the picture amp Review the picture p 55 e The captured image will be displayed for 2 sec on the LCD 4 monitor W e To display the image again press the lt L gt gt button p 250 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor see Live View Shooting p 199 e To view the images captured so far see Image Playback p 250 e T
213. ht light conditions the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image e Ifthe light source within the image changes the screen may flicker If this happens stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source to be used e f you point the camera in a different direction it may throw off the Live View image s correct brightness momentarily Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting e If there is a very bright light source in the picture the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor However the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area In low light if you set the 2 LCD brightness to a bright setting noise or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image However the noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image When you magnify the image the image sharpness may look more pronounced than it really is Custom Functions e During Live View shooting certain Custom Function settings will not take effect p 320 Lens and Flash e The focus preset function is possible during Live View shooting only when using a super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed since the second half of 2011 e FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used 218 Shooting Movies Movie shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt
214. ic Operation lt Multi controller The lt gt consists of an eight direction key and a button at the center e Use it to select the AF point correct the white balance move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View shooting scroll around magnified images during playback operate the Quick Control screen etc You can also use it to select or set menu options except gt 1 Erase images and 1 Format card For menus and the Quick Control screen the Multi controller works only in the vertical and horizontal directions It does not work in diagonal directions LOCK Multi function Lock With 2 Multi function lock set p 325 and the lt LOCK gt switch set to the right it prevents the Main Dial Quick Control Dial and Multi lt LOCK gt switch set to the left Lock released lt LOCK gt switch set to the right Lock engaged Fl If the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel On the shooting settings display p 48 LOCK will be displayed 47 Basic Operation 6 LCD Panel Illumination 4 Turn on 6 off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the lt 8 gt button During a bulb exposure pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the LCD panel illumination Displaying Shooting
215. icture Style selection screen will Bes GP Gel EN then reappear Basil a1 Bed Bats gt The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of User Def If a Picture Style has already been registered under User Def changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style If you execute Clear all camera settings p 56 all the User Def settings will revert to their defaults Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility provided software will have only its modified parameters reverted to their default settings To use the adjusted Picture Style select the registered User Def then shoot For the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera refer to the EOS Utility Instructions p 396 WB Setting the White Balance mau White balance WB is for making the white areas look white Normally the lt ENT gt Auto setting will obtain the correct white balance If natural looking colors cannot be obtained with lt EM gt you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object lt MB gt is automatically set in the lt j gt mode 1 Press the lt WB gt button 66 2 Select the white balance While looking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial Mode J Color Temperature Approx K Kelvins White fluorescent light Applicable with Speedli
216. ie dspiey All 61 AF points are always displayed EEJ Help oc Selected pre AF focused The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 2 and 4 The selected AF point s is displayed for 1 and 4 OFF Disable display For 2 3 and 4 the selected AF point s will not be displayed 104 M9 Customizing AF Functions EE E If Selected pre AF focused or Selected focused is set the AF point will not be displayed even when focus is achieved with Al Servo AF VF display illumination The AF points and grid in the viewfinder can be illuminated in red when focus is achieved VF display illumination AUTO Auto Auto The AF points and grid are automatically alone illuminated in red under low light F ON Enable The AF points and grid are illuminated in red regardless of the ambient light level OFF Disable The AF points and grid are not illuminated in red QD The setting here is not applied to the electronic level display p 59 in the viewfinder F When you press the lt EJ gt button the AF points and grid will be illuminated in red regardless of this setting AF Microadjustment You can make fine adjustments for the AF s point of focus For details see Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus on page 106 105 7210 Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus ma Fine adjustment of the AF s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting in the Quick mode This is c
217. ietienieiye Ata Barn teresa teen 225 Shooting Still POS acveriva cicada a A deed tana 230 Shooting Function Settings ws wecrnath a A ete 232 Setting the Movie Recording SiZe cscsscccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 Setting the Sound Recording cc eeeeseseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 236 SUIS OTM AOE N E A 238 Seting th TIME Goode creag i a 239 Menu Function Settings c cccccscccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeenaeaes 243 Image Playback 249 Image Playback cceeeseeeeteeseeeeeeeseeeeteneeesieeeteeeeneenan 250 INFO Shooting Information Display ccccccccseesecsecsseeseeenees 252 e Searching for Images Quickly ccccceccseeeseceeeeeeneeeees 255 Ce Magnined Viewin A 257 1 Comparing Images Two image Display c ccccseceeen 259 Rotating the Mage faxvetideshcavictiensnsniha a Ea TE 260 Seting RANGS ee a pen tay ance ule R ESA NEEE stuewentayanaed 261 Q Quick Control During Playback cccccsccsseecseeseeeseeeteeens 263 Contents MOR MOVING MOVIE Sinn RA 265 We Playing MOVES eoa e a sete erat n 267 X Editing the Movie s First and Last Scenes cceceeeeeeeees 269 Slide Show Auto Playback neran abececcieecetes 271 Viewing the Images on TV c ceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 274 ea PROCS ChINGHIMAGSS a6 asia ee tails So ae 278 Copying Mage S naaa E BA Sean arate 280 Erasing IMAGES nsise aa a a 283 Changi
218. iew Shooting e Live View shooting e Focusing e Aspect ratio Movie Shooting e Movie shooting e Movie recording size e Sound recording e Time code e HDMI output e Still photo shooting gt p 150 gt p 160 gt p 24 gt p 175 gt p 179 gt p 186 gt p 167 gt p 188 gt p 49 gt p 171 gt p 172 gt p 173 gt p 323 gt p 189 gt p 193 gt p 198 gt p 199 gt p 209 gt p 206 gt p 219 gt p 233 gt p 236 gt p 239 gt p 245 gt p 230 Index to Features Playback e Image review time e Single image display gt p 55 gt p 250 Shooting information display gt p 252 e Index display gt p 255 Image browsing Jump display gt p 256 e Magnified view e Two image display e Image rotate e Rating e Movie playback e Slide show e Viewing images on TV e Protect e Copying e Erase Image Editing e RAW image processing e Resize gt p 257 gt p 259 gt p 260 gt p 261 gt p 267 gt p 271 gt p 274 gt p 278 gt p 280 gt p 283 gt p 288 gt p 293 Printing and Transferring Images e PictBridge e Print Order DPOF e Image transfer Customization gt p 302 gt p 311 gt p 315 e Custom Functions C Fn gt p 320 e Custom Controls e My Menu e Custom shooting mode gt p 327 gt p 337 gt p 338 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction e Sensor cleaning gt p 296 e A
219. ight such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day take the picture promptly after mirror lockup e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components f you use the self timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure keep pressing the shutter button completely self timer delay time bulb exposure time If you let go of the shutter button during the self timer countdown there will be a shutter release sound but no picture will be taken e During mirror lockup shooting function settings and menu operations etc are disabled Fl e Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting only one shot can be taken e You can also use the self timer with mirror lockup f 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up it will go back down automatically Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again e For mirror lockup using a tripod and Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately is recommended p 187 e You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 188 Setting the remote controller to a 2 sec delay is recommended 186 Using the Eyepiece Cover mE When you use the self timer or shoot bulb exposures and do not look through the viewfinder stray light entering the viewfinder
220. ill be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor 247 4 Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality e f you use a card having a slow writing speed a five level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie Ery shooting It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory The slower the card the faster the indicator will climb upward If the indicator becomes full movie shooting will stop automatically If the card has a fast writing speed the indicator will either not appear or the level if displayed will hardly go upward First shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough Indicator Still Photo Shooting During Movie Shooting e Regarding the image quality of still photos see Image Quality on page 217 Playback and TV connection In autoexposure shooting shutter priority AE or aperture priority AE modes if the brightness changes during movie shooting the movie may freeze temporarily In such cases shoot movies with manual exposure e If you connect the camera to a TV set p 274 277 and shoot a movie the TV will not output any sound during the shooting However the sound will be properly recorded 248 Image Playback This chapter explains how to play back and erase photos and movies how to display them ona TV screen and other playback related functions About images t
221. illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction Highlight tone priority 229 Shooting Movies Shooting Still Photos While shooting a movie you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely Taking still photos during movie shooting If you take a still photo during movie shooting the movie will record a still moment lasting approx 1 sec The captured still photo will be recorded to the card and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card lf Record func p 118 is set to Standard or Auto switch card the movies and still photos will be recorded to the same card If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set the movies will be recorded to the card set for Playback The still photos will be recorded at the image recording quality set for the respective card Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting As set in 1 Image quality When the movie recording size is 1920x1080 or 1280x720 the aspect ratio will be 16 9 When the size is 640x480 the aspect ratio will be 4 3 e lt G P Tv Av B gt 100 12800 ISO Speed e lt M gt See ISO speed during manual exposure shooting on page 226 e lt P B gt Automatically set shutter speed and aperture e l
222. ing 10 sec self timer remote control 2 sec self timer remote control Continuous shooting speed High speed continuous shooting Max approx 6 shots sec Low speed continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec Silent continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec Max burst JPEG Large Fine Approx 65 shots approx 16270 shots RAW Approx 13 shots approx 18 shots RAW JPEG Large Fine Approx 7 shots approx 7 shots Figures are based on Canon s testing standards ISO 100 and Standard Picture Style and a 8 GB card Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7 128 GB card based on Canon s testing standards e External Speedlite Compatible Speedlites EX series Speedlites Flash metering E TTL Il autoflash Flash exposure compensation 3 stops in 1 3 or 1 2 stop increments FE lock Provided PC terminal Provided External Speedlite control Provided Compatible with radio wireless flash photography 381 Specifications e Live View Shooting Aspect ratio settings Focus modes Focusing brightness range Metering modes Metering range Silent shooting Grid display e Movie Shooting Movie recording compression Audio recording format Recording format Recording size and frame rate Compression method File size Focus modes Metering modes 382 3 2 4 3 16 9 1 1 Live mode Face detection Live mode contrast detection Quick mode phase difference detection Manua
223. ing four or nine images on one screen 1 Press the lt Q gt button e During image playback press the lt Q gt button gt Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen 2 Switch to the index display e Turn the lt gt dial counterclockwise gt The 4 image index display will appear The currently selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame e If you turn the lt gt dial further counterclockwise the 9 image index display will appear Turning the lt gt dial clockwise will switch the display from 9 images 4 images and to one image TT ae 3 Select an image Cee e Turn the lt gt dial to move the blue frame and select the image e Press the lt Q gt button to turn off the 42 Q icon then turn the lt 2 gt dial to go to the next or preceding screen Press lt 7 gt in the index display and the selected image will be displayed as a single image 209 gt Searching for Images Quickly SSS Jump through Images Jump Display With the single image display you can turn the lt gt dial to jump through the images forward or back according to the jump method set ao a 1 Select Image jump w 7 3 Resize e Under the gt 12 tab select Image Rating jump w 23 then press lt gt Slide show Image transfer ae E 2 Select the jump method e Turn the lt gt dial to select the jump method then p
224. ing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal OOO OOUO00 OOOO ERE si a ogogo OOOO 000 lines Disabled AF points not displayed EF800mm f 5 6L IS USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 III USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 II EF22 55mm f 4 5 6 USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 IV USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 III EF28 70mm f 3 5 4 5 EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 V USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 PZ EF28 70mm f 3 5 4 5 Il EF28 105mm f 4 5 6 EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 EF28 105mm f 4 5 6 USM EF35 350mm f 3 5 5 6L USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 USM EF35 70mm 3 5 4 5 EF80 200mm 1 4 5 5 6 II EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 Il EF35 70mm f 3 5 4 5A EF80 200mm f 4 5 5 6 USM EF28 80mm f 3 5 5 6 Il USM EF35 80mm f 4 5 6 83 Lenses and Usable AF Points Group G Autofocusing with only 33 points is possible Not possible with all 61 AF points All of the AF area selection modes are selectable During automatic AF point selection the outer frame marking the AF area Area AF frame will be different from 61 point automatic selection AF E Cross type AF point Subject aja P E E 5 P mja tracking is superior and high OO gg8 co precision focusing is achieved l Ueeedn O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines Disabled AF points not displayed EF180mm 3 5L Macro USM EF 180mm f 3 5L Macro USM lees 200mm 1 5 6L USM Extender EF1 4x Group H Only the AF point a
225. ion When Enable is set image distortion due to the lens characteristics is corrected lf Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed The image periphery will be cropped in the corrected image Since the image resolution may look slightly lower use the Picture Style s Sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary QD When processing images with Distortion correction set to Enable AF point display information p 253 and Dust Delete data p 297 will not be appended to the image 291 RAWI Processing RAW Images with the Camera or Chromatic aberration correction When Enable is set the lens chromatic aberrations color fringing along the subject s outline can be corrected If Enable is set the corrected image will be displayed If the effect is difficult to discern press the lt Q gt button to magnify the image Press the lt Q gt button to return to the normal view OD About peripheral illumination correction distortion correction and chromatic aberration correction To execute peripheral illumination correction distortion correction and chromatic aberration correction with the camera the data of the lens used for the shot must be registered in the camera If the lens data has not been registered in the camera use EOS Utility provided software p 394 to register the lens data QD Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results as processing RAW images wit
226. ist beam firing Enable Disable IR AF assist beam only One Shot AF release priority Release priority Focus priority AF AF4 Purple rens Chive wnenar Continue focus search Stop focus search 100 impossible 100 Selectable AF point 61 points Only cross type AF points A 15 points 9 points Manual selection Spot AF Manual selection Select AF area 1 point AF Expand AF area a Expand AF selection mode area Surround Manual selection Zone AF Auto selection 61 point AF ar De eene gt M Fn button Main Dial 10 method Orientation linked AF Same for both vertical horizontal Select 10 point separate AF points AF AF5 Purple Manua Aa poni Stops at AF area edges Continuous 104 selection pattern Selected constant All constant Selected pre AF focused Selected focused Disable display VF display illumination Auto Enable Disable 105 AF Microadjustment Disable All by same amount Adjust by lens 106 AF point display during focus 357 Menu Settings gt Playback 1 Blue Page Protect images Erase protect images 278 Rotate image Rotate vertical images Print order Specify images to be printed DPOF Image copy Copy images between cards gt Playback 2 Blue Resize Downsize the image s Aaii count 293 OFF E4 G amp Playback description Display time and Repeat for auto playback Image transfer Select images to be
227. ith a new CR1616 lithium battery The date time zone setting will also be reset so be sure to set the correct date time zone p 36 1 Set the power switch to lt OFF gt 2 Unscrew the battery holder screw e Use a small Phillips screwdriver e Be careful not to lose the screw Take off the battery holder e Push out the battery as shown by arrow 2 Replace the battery in the battery holder e Make sure the new battery is in the proper orientation Tighten the battery holder s screw Q For the date time battery be sure to use a CR1616 lithium battery 349 Using Eye Fi Cards mE With a commercially available Eye Fi card already set up you can automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN The image transfer is a function of the Eye Fi card For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems refer to the Eye Fi card s instruction manual or contact the card s manufacturer q The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye Fi card functions including wireless transfer In case of an issue with an Eye Fi card please check with the card manufacturer Also note that approval is required to use Eye Fi cards in many countries or regions Without approval use of the card is not permitted If it is unclear whether the card has
228. l camera settings Cancel OK Shooting Settings AF ode One Shot AF SR AF area Single point AF Exposure selection mode Manual selection compensation Canceled AF point selection Center AEB i 0 Zero O compensation Metering mode z Evaluative metering Multiple exposure ISO speed HDR Mode Disable HDR Minimum limit 100 Mirror lockup ISO speed range Maximum limit 25600 Custom TEN Auto ISO range Minimum limit 100 Functions Maximum limit 12800 Flash function ISO Auto minimum io settings shutter speed Unchanged 56 Before You Start Image recording Settings AF Settings Image quality Case1 Parameter Picture Style Standard Case 1 6 settings of all Auto Lighting SAWS cases cleared Optimizer Al Servo 1st image Equal priority Peripheral Enable priomiy illumination Correction data Al Servo 2nd image a correction retained priority Equal priority Chromatic Enable USM lens electronic Enable after aberration Correction data MF One Shot AF correction retained AF assist beam firing Enable White balance EME Auto One Shot AF ere Focus priority Custom White Balance release priority White balance Lens drive when AF Continue focus i Canceled correction impossible search White balance Selectable AF point 61 points bracketin Canceled g Select AF area All modes O Long exposure AF area selection High ISO speed Standard Orientation linked
229. l focusing Approx 5x 10x magnification possible EV 1 18 with contrast detection at 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Evaluative metering with the image sensor EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Provided Mode 1 and 2 Three types MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Variable average bit rate Linear PCM MOV 1920x1080 Full HD 30p 25p 24p 1280x720 HD 60p 50p 640x480 SD 30p 25p 30p 29 97 fps 25p 25 00 fps 24p 23 976 fps 60p 59 94 fps 50p 50 00 fps ALL I only IPB 1920x1080 30p 25p 24p IPB Approx 235 MB min 1920x1080 30p 25p 24p ALL I Approx 685 MB min 1280x720 60p 50p IPB Approx 205 MB min 1280x720 60p 50p ALL I Approx 610 MB min 640x480 80p 25p IPB Approx 78 MB min Card reading writing speed necessary for movie shooting CF card IPB at least 10 MB per sec ALL I at least 30 MB per sec SD card IPB at least 6 MB per sec ALL I at least 20 MB per sec Same as focusing with Live View shooting Center weighted average and Evaluative metering with the image sensor Automatically set by the focusing mode Specifications Metering range EV 0 20 at 23 C 73 F with EF50mm f 1 4 USM lens ISO 100 Exposure control 1 Autoexposure 2 Shutter priority AE 3 Aperture priority AE 4 Manual exposure With 1 2 and 3 exposure compensation and AE lock are possible except in Scene Intelligent Auto mode Exposure compensation 3 stops in 1 3 stop in
230. leaning does not work e If you repeatedly turn the power switch lt ON gt and lt OFF gt at a short interval the lt t gt icon may not be displayed p 34 Printing Related Problems There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer This instruction manual lists all the printing effects available p 306 Image Transfer Problems cannot transfer images to a personal computer e Install the provided software EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk CD ROM on the personal computer p 395 Check that EOS Utility s main window is displayed 376 Error Codes le Error number lf there is a problem with the camera an error message will appear Follow the on screen instructions Err 01 Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Countermeasures Error Message amp Solution Communications between the camera and lens is faulty Clean the lens contacts Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens or use a Canon lens p 15 18 Card cannot be accessed Reinsert change card or format card with camera gt Remove and insert the card again replace the card or format the card p 31 53 Cannot save images because card is full Replace card Replace the card erase unnecessary images or format the card p 31 53 283 gt Operate the power switch p
231. lectable AF area selection modes to suit your shooting preferences Turn the lt gt dial to select a selection mode then press lt gt to append a lt v gt checkmark Then select OK to register the setting Select AF area selec mode El Manual select Spot AF For pinpoint focusing with a narrower AF point than single point AF O Manual selection 1 pt AF Cancel One of the AF points set by Selectable AF point setting can be selected Manual select Spot AF Fi as Expand AF area 2 The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the adjacent AF points above below left and right sos Expand AF area Surround The camera will focus with the manually selected AF point and the surrounding AF points 101 tM Customizing AF Functions J Manual select Zone AF The 61 AF points are divided into nine zones for focusing cL Auto selection 61 pt AF All of the AF points are used for focusing WD e The lt v gt mark cannot be deleted from Manual selection 1 pt AF e Ifthe attached lens belongs to group H p 84 85 you can only select Manual select Spot AF Manual selection 1 pt AF and Expand AF area AF area selection method You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode AF area selection method WD gt M Fn button S M Fn button After you press the lt E gt button each Main Dial time you press the lt M Fn gt button the AF area selection mode ch
232. lete Data O Ee data to be used by provided software to 297 delete dust spots Multiple exposure Multiple exposure control Multiple exposure No of exposures Save source images Continue multiple exposure Adjust dynamic range Effect Continuous PO MOSE HDR Auto Image Align Save source images For movie shooting Multiple exposure and HDR Mode cannot be selected grayed out 355 Menu Settings 3 Shooting 4 Red Page Exposure simulation Enable During Disable Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min Metering timer 30 min In the lt J gt mode these menu options are displayed under 32 AF AF1 Purple Versatile multi purpose setting Case 2 Continue to track subjects ignoring possible obstacles Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points For subjects that accelerate or decelerate Case 4 i quickly Case 5 For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction disabled in Single point AF mode Casag For subjects that change speed and move erratically disabled in Single point AF mode AF AF2 Purple Al Servo 1st image nT a Sas Release priority Equal priority Focus priority Al Servo 2nd image Shooting speed priority Equal priority Focus 97 priority priority 356 Menu Settings AF AF3 Purple Page s Enable after One Shot AF Disable after One E ot AF Disable in AF mode AF ass
233. m However if an EX series Speedlite sold separately equipped with a LED light is used the LED light will turn on automatically for AF assist when necessary in the Live mode and amp face detection Live mode 212 Using AF to Focus ae Shooting conditions that can make focusing difficult e Low contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid color flat surfaces Subjects in low light Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction Under a light source whose brightness color or pattern keeps changing Night scenes or points of light Under fluorescent or LED light sources or when the image flickers Extremely small subjects Subjects at the edge of the picture Subjects strongly reflecting light The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject such as an animal in a cage Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur A subject approaching or moving away from the camera Autofocusing while the subject is way out of focus Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens A special effects filter is used 4D If you use AF with any of the following lenses using Quick mode is recommended If you use the Live mode or 4 Live mode for AF it may take a longer time to achieve focus or the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus EF50mm f 1 4 USM EF50mm f 1 8 Il EF50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro
234. m will be able to emit the beam Set this if you do not want the AF assist to be emitted as small flashes 4D If the external Speedlite s Custom Function AF assist beam firing is set to Disable this function s setting will be overridden and the AF assist beam will not be emitted One Shot AF release priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing for One Shot AF One Shot AF release prior Focus priority The picture is not taken until focus is achieved Effective when you want to Focus priority a To achieve focus before capturing the shot Release oo ca o Release priority mro Feri Priority is given to taking the picture instead of achieving focus This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus Note that the picture will be taken even if focus has not been achieved 99 tM Customizing AF Functions SSS eal AF4 Lens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus you can have the camera keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching Lens drive when AF impossible ON Continue focus search Continue focus search ON If focus cannot be achieved with Stop focus search OFF autofocus the lens is driven to search for the correct focus Lens operation when focus OFF Stop focus search could not be achieved ZB Help If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved the lens
235. maller you make the trimming frame the grainier the picture will look in the print While trimming the image look at the camera s LCD monitor If you look at the image on a TV screen the trimming frame may not be displayed accurately F Handling Printer Errors If you resolve a printer error no ink no paper etc and select Continue to resume printing but it does not resume operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing For details on resuming the printing refer to the printer s instruction manual Error Messages If a problem occurs during printing an error message will appear on the camera s LCD monitor Press lt gt to stop printing After fixing the problem resume printing For details on how to fix a printing problem refer to the printer s instruction manual Paper Error Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer Ink Error Check the printer s ink level and check the waste ink tank Hardware Error Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems File Error The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable 310 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF mau You can set the print type date imprinting and file number imprinting The print settings will be applied to all print ordered images They cannot be set individually for each image Setting the Printing Options Go
236. mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF2x 00mm f 4 DO IS USM Extender 1 4x p Econ USN With built in Ext 1 4x Ext EF1 4x Extender EF2x EF EF600mm f 4L IS II USM EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF2x Extender 1 4x Extender EF2x EF4 Extender EF2x i e If the maximum aperture is smaller than f 5 6 the maximum aperture value is larger than f 5 6 up to f 8 focus may not be achieved with AF when shooting low contrast or low light subjects When Extender EF2x is attached to the EF 180mm f 3 5L Macro USM lens AF is not possible Ifthe maximum aperture is smaller than f 8 the maximum aperture value exceeds f 8 AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting Also AF is not possible with AMID during Live View shooting and movie shooting 85 Lenses and Usable AF Points Group Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable TT E Cross type AF point Subject H E E E 4 tracking is superior and high H g H precision focusing is achieved ae oa O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM Extender 1 4x CD When using a lens and an Extender in the combination marked with precise focus may not be achieved with AF In such a case refer to the instruction manual of the lens or Extender used F Both Extender EF1 4x and Extender EF2x apply to all the I II II models under this
237. mming printing eeeee 309 Apod SOCKet sei 20 Tv Shutter priority AE 164 221 Two image display cee 259 i Ultra DMA UDMA eee 32 USB Digital terminal 302 315 Video system 0 233 277 360 View on TV atraiis tes 488 euavend 265 274 VIGWFINGEL sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 23 Dioptric adjustment 4 43 Electronic level 0 59 335 Grid display lt 2 oanadeecsce ieee aia 59 Volume Movie playback 268 Warning ICON essesee sy ioerendcenesclLis 324 WB White balance 0 139 White balance eects 139 BACK GLUING dencecessssseedeussesnezezane st 143 Color temperature setting 141 Correction utencarias duoc sevens 142 CUSTOM acco erri A 140 GlSONAl uitasstecsaantoinssaceereasiad 141 Wind filter shsc coed crtoaanecoonomeemmecans 236 E ZOMG ee ae aeeie E AEOS 36 Zone AF sessile a na 73 Canon The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2014 For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date contact any Canon Service Center For the latest version Instruction Manual refer to the Canon Web site CPH E002 005 CANON INC 2014
238. n the lt gt dial to select lt gt or lt 2 gt Press the remote controller s transmit button e Point the remote controller toward the camera s remote control sensor and press the transmit button gt The self timer lamp lights and the picture is taken GD Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter inadvertently Try to keep the camera away from such light Sources 188 Flash Photography This chapter explains how to shoot with an EOS dedicated EX series Speedlite Sold separately or non Canon flash unit and how to set flash functions on the camera s menu screen 4 Flash Photography mae EOS dedicated EX series Speedlites An Ex series Speedlite sold separately makes flash photography as easy as normal shooting For detailed instructions refer to the EX series Speedlite s instruction manual This camera is a Type A camera that can use all the features of EX series Speedlites To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera s menu see pages 193 198 Shoe mount Speedlites Macro Lites FE lock This enables you to attain a proper flash exposure for a specific part of the subject Aim the viewfinder center over the subject then press the camera s lt M Fn gt button and take the picture e Flash exposure compensation In the same way as normal exposure compensation flash exposure compensation can be set You c
239. n the lt LOCKP gt switch is set to the right it will prevent the lt s gt lt gt and lt gt from accidentally changing a setting Select the camera control you want to lock then press lt gt to append a checkmark lt v gt and select OK 3 Main Dial Quick Control Dial lt e3 Multi controller El f the lt LOCK gt switch is set and you try to use one of the locked camera controls lt L gt will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel Also on the shooting settings display p 48 LOCK will be displayed e By default when the lt LOCK gt switch is set to the right the lt 3 gt dial will be locked e Even if the lt 3 gt dial is appended with a lt v gt checkmark you can still use the touch pad lt gt Custom Controls You can assign often used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences For details see page 327 325 tam Custom Function Settings O O C Fn3 Others Add cropping information If you set cropping information vertical lines for the aspect ratio you have set will appear on the Live View image You can then compose the shot as if you were shooting with a medium or large format camera 6x6 cm 4x5 inch etc When you take a picture the aspect ratio information for cropping the image with the provided software will be appended to the image The image is recorded to the card without being cropped After the image is
240. n the Live View shooting Movie reese rego shooting switch is set to lt gt the 1234 Grid display Of and 5 tabs dedicated to movie ee Leslee shooting will be displayed The menu Silent LV shoot Mode 1 options are as follows Metering timer 16 see In the lt gt mode 482 and 63 will be displayed e AF mode The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 209 215 You can select Live mode Live mode or Quick mode Note that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible Even if the AF mode is set to Quick mode it will switch to Live mode during movie shooting Grid display With 3x3 F or 6x4 you can display grid lines It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally Also with 3x3 diag K the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you align the intersections over the subject for better balance in the es composition e Movie recording size You can set the movie recording size image size frame rate and compression method For details see pages 233 to 235 e Sound recording You can set sound recording settings For details see pages 236 and 237 243 t Menu Function Settings a a a Silent LV shooting This function applies to still photo shooting For details see page 208 e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time 65 Menu o Time code Silent Control Disable amp Movie sh
241. nd certain subjects for anything but private enjoyment Also be aware that certain public performances exhibitions etc may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment Memory Cards In this manual CF card refers to CompactFlash cards and SD card refers to SD SDHC SDXC cards Card refers to all memory cards used to record images or movies The camera does not come with a card for recording images movies Please purchase it separately Item Check List Before starting check that all the following items have been included with your camera If anything is missing contact your dealer Eyecup Eg Battery Pack Battery Charger LP E6 LC E6 LC E6E with protective cover Camera with body cap ao Wide Strap Interface Cable Stereo AV Cable IFC 200U AVC DC400ST 1 2 1 Camera Instruction Manual this booklet 2 Pocket Guide EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Software Software Instruction Manuals Battery Charger LC E6 or LC E6E is provided The LC E6E comes with a power cord e Attach Eyecup Eg to the viewfinder eyepiece e f you purchased a Lens Kit check that the lens is included e Depending on the Lens Kit type a lens instruction manual may also be included e Be careful not to lose any of the above items Software Instruction Manuals The Software Instruction Manuals are included on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk as PDF files See page 396 for instructions to look up i
242. ndard exposure index A Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be displayed Exposure level mark in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel The exposure level mark lt f gt indicates how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level ie Set the exposure and take the picture Check the exposure level and set the desired shutter speed and aperture Ifthe exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt q gt or lt gt dD If ISO Auto is set the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter speed and aperture to obtain a standard exposure Therefore you may not obtain the desired exposure effect 168 Selecting the Metering Mode gl In 2 Auto Lighting Optimizer if the checkmark lt v gt for Disable during man expo is removed it can be set in the lt M gt mode p 144 When ISO Auto is set you can press the lt gt button to lock the ISO speed e After recomposing the picture you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator p 22 23 compared to when you pressed the lt gt button Selecting the Metering Mode amuses You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness The metering mode is set automatically to evaluative metering in the lt 43 gt mode 1 Press the lt WB gt button 66 2 Sele
243. ned in the process It may cause a fire electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it e Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes skin and clothing It can cause blindness or skin problems If the battery leakage contacts your eyes skin or clothing flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it See a physician immediately e Do not leave any cords near a heat source It can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time Even if the camera does not feel too hot prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness blistering or low temperature contact burns Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin or when using the camera in very hot places e Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle It may cause an accident e Do not fire the flash near a person s eyes It may impair the person s vision When using flash to photograph an infant keep at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away 389 Safety Precautions e When the camera or accessories are not in use make sure to remove the battery and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing This is to prevent electrical shock excessive heat fire or corrosion e Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas This is to prevent an explosion or a fire e
244. nformation in the Software Instruction Manuals Conventions Used in this Manual mu Icons in this Manual lt gt Indicates the Main Dial lt 93 gt Indicates the Quick Control Dial lt gt Indicates the Multi controller lt G1 gt Indicates the Setting button 64 66 610 616 Indicates that the corresponding function remains active for 4 sec 6 sec 10 sec or 16 sec respectively after you let go of the button In this manual the icons and markings indicating the camera s buttons dials and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor tN indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the lt MENU gt button and changing the setting x When shown at the upper right of a page it indicates that the function is available only when the Mode Dial is setto P Tv Av M or B The respective function cannot be used in the lt 3 gt Scene Intelligent Auto mode Reference page numbers for more information Warning to prevent shooting problems Supplemental information Tips or advice for better shooting S ele c Problem solving advice Basic Assumptions All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch has been set to lt ON gt and the lt LOCK gt switch has been set to the left Multi function lock released p 34 47 It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functi
245. ng Image Playback Settings sesessseessteceeeeeeeeees 285 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness cccceeeeeeeeeeeees 285 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaees 286 10 Post Processing Images 287 RW Processing RAW Images with the Camera ccccceceees 288 EA RESIZE nuset a aaa 293 11 Sensor Cleaning 295 co Automatic Sensor Cleaning ccccccccescceecsscessecseseeeeeeees 296 Appending Dust Delete Data oc ccccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 297 Manual Sensor Cleaning vcaiccisvacauiesasactiareciianesovbelenssiniteiioden 299 Preparing to Print o cxe ces ondaay ties al tecencobdent ade bvaneatanadeaamdenervaenanedaaannaaes 302 fat Gee da lilac aana renee een a een ime ier ener er 304 Trimming the IMAG Ca ectadsrnswessdacese eevee series Seehaavocedhcrnitedpetedueans 309 gt Digital Print Order Format DPOF osese 311 Direct Printing with DPOF cccccccccccsecseesseeseseeeceeeeaeens 314 Transferring Images to a Personal Computer 0066 315 10 Contents 13 Customizing the Camera CUSTOM FUNCIONS zaiana aa a 320 Custom Function SettingS ccccccssssssesececscsceseeceeeceseeseseseseeeees 321 O FAT EXPOSUIG aucion a a a 321 C Fn2 DIS pJ OperatON xi wccerevscuneveerteveessasevoescusteosissenceneban tec 324 OPNS OMGIS ea a aN 326 2 Custom Contios ath ee Na eh a Le eh aan 327 Registering MY WO AUS
246. ng as the AF point covering the desired subject lights up you can take the picture e The beeper continues to beep softly The focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject The AF status indicator lt x gt is displayed but the focus confirmation light lt gt does not light up You can take sharp pictures of a moving subject Note that focus lock p 67 will not work in this case e Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to lt MF gt Manual Focus set it to lt AF gt Autofocus 65 G Fully Automatic Shooting Scene Intelligent Auto a S e The shutter speed display is blinking Since it is too dark taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera shake Using a tripod or a Canon EX series Speedlite p 190 sold separately is recommended e When flash was used the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark If a hood is attached to the lens it can obstruct the flash coverage If the subject is close detach the hood before taking the picture with flash 66 5 Full Auto Techniques Scene Intelligent Auto Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective In the lt 4J gt mode while you press the shutter button halfway to focus
247. ng exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed BUSY will be displayed during the noise reduction process The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is completed You cannot take another picture 147 mM Highlight Tone Priority memm You can minimize overexposed highlight areas Ea o o Q x 1 Select Highlight tone priority Picture Style Auto e Under the 63 tab select Long exp noise reduction i i ioari Bos Highlight tone priority then press Highlight tone priority lt E gt Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR Highlight tone priority Select Enable Disable Turn the lt gt dial to select Enable enable then press lt gt Highlight details are improved The eee ce aa nb dynamic range is expanded from the casa i iia standard 18 gray to bright highlights The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with highlight tone priority applied a e With Enable the Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 is automatically set to Disable and the setting cannot be changed When Highlight tone priority is set to Disable the Auto Lighting Optimizer will revert to its original setting e With Enable image noise may increase slightly more than with Disable Fl With Enable the settable range will be ISO 200 25600 ISO 200 12800 for movie shooting Also the
248. ng movie shooting Fl About Full HD 1080 Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with High Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels scanning lines otek 235 7219 Setting the Sound Recording sx Sound recording You can shoot movies while recording Sound rec Auto sound with the built in monaural microphone or a commercially available stereo microphone You can also freely adjust the sound recording level Set the sound recording with I0 4 Sound recording In the lt J gt mode this setting is displayed in 32 Wind filter Disable Sound Recording Sound Recording Level Auto The sound recording level is adjusted automatically Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level Manual For advanced users You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels Select Rec level and look at the level meter while turning the lt 3 gt dial to adjust the sound recording level While looking at the peak hold indicator 3 sec adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the 12 12 dB mark on the right for the loudest sounds If it exceeds 0 the sound will be distorted Disable Sound will not be recorded Wind Filter When set to Enable it reduces wind noise when there is wind outdoors This works only with the built in microphone Note that Enable will also reduce low bass sounds so set it to Disable when there is no wind It will make s
249. ng up to 3 stops If you want to set the exposure compensation setting beyond 3 stops you should use the Quick Control p 49 or follow the instructions for 2 Expo comp AEB on the next page Check the exposure level indicator e Press the shutter button halfway 64 and check the exposure level indicator Increased exposure for a 2 Set the exposure compensation brighter image amount While looking at the viewfinder or LCD panel turn the lt gt dial oe i e If it cannot be set set the lt LOCKR gt switch to the left then turn the lt 3 gt dial Decreased exposure for a darker image 3 Take the picture aay We e To cancel the exposure compensation set the exposure compensation amount back to lt gt QD lf 92 Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 is not set to Disable the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure compensation amount has been set E The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to lt OFF gt e After setting the exposure compensation amount you can set the lt LOCK gt switch to the right to prevent the exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally e f the exposure compensation amount exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt q gt or lt p gt 171 K Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB mum By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically the camera
250. nge the aperture silently with lt gt the movie will still record the lens aperture driving sound e If there is water or dirt on the lt gt the touch operation may not work In such a case use a clean cloth to clean the lt gt If it still does not work wait a while and try again in Before shooting a movie use the lt gt to adjust the sound recording level in the Quick Control and Rec level screens 238 Mam Setting the Time Code m The time code is a time reference Time code Sane GS ay recorded automatically to synchronize Start time setting the video and audio during movie ees shooting It is recorded at all times in the ovie play count Rec time HDMI following units hours minutes seconds Drop frame Enable and frames It is mainly used during MENU a s movie editing Set the time code with 5 Time code In the lt J gt mode this function is displayed in 3 Count Up Rec run The time code counts up only while you are shooting a movie The time code will be continuous across sequential movie files Free run The time code counts up whether you are shooting or not Start Time Setting You can set the time code s start time Manual input setting You can freely set the hour minute second and frames Reset The time set with Manual input setting and Set to camera time is reset to 00 00 00 00 Set to camera time Sets hours minutes and seconds to mat
251. nify the image by pressing the lt Q gt button in step 3 The magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of Image quality set in RAW image processing With lt gt you can scroll around the magnified image To cancel the magnified view press the lt Q gt button again Images with Aspect Ratio Setting Images shot in a Live View shooting aspect ratio 4 3 16 9 1 1 will be displayed in the respective aspect ratio JPEG images will also be saved in the set aspect ratio 289 RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera EE RAW Image processing Options e 0 Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to 1 stop in 1 3 stop increments The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect i White balance p 139 You can select the white balance If you select K turn the lt gt dial to set the color temperature on the setting screen The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect e zy Picture Style p 131 You can select the Picture Style To set the parameters such as Sharpness press lt gt to display the setting screen Turn the lt gt dial to select the Picture Style Turn the lt gt dial to select a parameter to be adjusted then turn the lt gt dial to set it To return to the screen in step 3 press lt gt The displayed image will reflect the setting s effect B Auto Lighting Optimizer p 144 You can set the Auto Lighting
252. nly while you hold down the depth of field preview button Disable GDH The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see Even if you set exposure compensation image is displayed at the standard brightness E e f you set an expanded ISO speed setting as Maximum in ISO speed range Live View shooting will be possible under darker conditions e Even if a low ISO speed is set noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light However when you shoot the image recorded will have minimal noise The image quality of the Live View image is different from that of the recorded image 207 t Menu Function Settings SSS SSS SSS Silent LV shooting Mode 1 The shooting operation noise is quieter than with normal shooting Continuous shooting is also possible If lt Glin gt is set you can shoot at a maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 6 fps e Mode 2 When the shutter button is pressed completely only one shot will be taken While you keep holding down the shutter button the camera operation will be suspended Then when you return to the shutter button s halfway position the camera operation will resume The shooting noise is thereby minimized Even if continuous shooting is set only a single shot will be taken e Disable Be sure to set it to Disable if you use a TS E lens other than those listed in below for shifting or tilting the lens o
253. not be played nor saved Playback on the Camera s LCD Monitor p 267 273 You can play back movies on the camera s LCD monitor You can also edit out the movie s first and last scenes and play back the still photos and movies on the card in an automatic slide show GD A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera 265 Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer p 394 The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a personal computer b and played with ImageBrowser EX onpopppooonnn nno poo eee eleelea O08 onni gooooogoooool 800 RERNI n0000 on uun J p CD e To have the movie play back smoothly on a personal computer use a high performance personal computer Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ImageBrowser EX refer to the PDF file ImageBrowser EX User Guide e f you want to use commercially available software to play back or edit the movies be sure it is compatible with MOV files For details on commercially available software contact the software maker 266 e Playing Movies m Play back the image e Press the lt gt gt button to display images 2 Select a movie Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the movie to be played e With the single image display the lt Mai gt icon displayed on the upper left indicate
254. ns serial E number you cannot register several copies of the same lens model Even if you enter the serial number will remain displayed The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number displayed on the screen in step 3 This is not a defect Ifthe lens serial number is eleven digits or longer enter only the last ten digits e Ifthe lens serial number includes letters enter only the numbers in step 3 e The location of the serial number differs depending on the lens Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed To register a lens that has no serial number inscribed enter any serial number in step 3 Fl e f Adjust by lens is selected and an Extender is used the adjustment will be registered for the lens and Extender combination e If 40 lenses have already been registered a message will appear After you select a lens whose registration is to be erased overwritten you can register another lens 109 tM Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus SSS SSS SS SS SSS eel Single focal length lens AF Microadjustment OOJEFSOmm f 1 8 Il EEJ View lens info Zoom lens AF Microadjustment 00 EF24 105mm F 4L iS USM j HFG View lens info AF Microadjustment EF24 105mm FAL 18 USM Adjust focus for each model of lens individually Disable Allby same amount 0 Adjust by lens Wit Ti 2 EEJ Change fa Clear all A Make the adjustment For a zoom lens turn the lt
255. nts in 13 groups f 22 0 45 m 1 48 ft from image sensor plane 0 23x at 105 mm 535 x 345 158 x 106 mm 21 1 x 13 6 6 2 x 4 2 in at 0 45 m Lens shift type 77 mMm E 77U E 77 Il 83 5 x 107 mm 3 3 x 4 2 in Approx 670 g 23 6 oz EW 83H LP1219 Specifications SSS E e All the data above is based on Canon s testing standards and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards and guidelines e Dimensions maximum diameter length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines except weight for camera body only e Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice lf a problem occurs with a non Canon lens attached to the camera consult the respective lens maker Trademarks e Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC e HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC e All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners About MPEG 4 Licensing This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be
256. o reduction Long exp noise reduction OFF TEET P Under the 63 tab select Long Highlight tone priority OFF exp noise reduction then press Dust Delete Data lt gt Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HOR Long exp noise reduction Set the desired setting Disable OFF e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the Auto AUTO aie ne desired setting then press lt G1 gt The setting screen closes and the Noise reduction applied to ima menu will reappear ges exposed at 1 sec or longer EEJ Help e Auto For 1 sec or longer exposures noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected This Auto setting is effective in most cases e Enable Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec or longer The Enable setting may be able to reduce noise that otherwise cannot be detected with the Auto setting 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied 146 tM Noise Reduction Settings E WD e With Auto and Enable after the picture is taken the noise reduction process may take the same amount of time as the exposure During noise reduction shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows 1 or higher Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the Enable setting than with the Disable and Auto settings e With Enable if a lo
257. o delete an image see Erasing Images p 283 17 Nomenclature mu lt WB gt Metering mode selection White balance selection button p 169 139 lt AF DRIVE gt AF mode selection Drive mode selection button p 70 114 lt M Fn gt AF area selection mode Multi function button p 73 190 lt ISO 4 gt I1ISO speed setting Flash exposure compensation button p 126 190 Lens mount index p 39 Flash sync contacts lt 8 gt LCD panel illumination button p 48 Hot shoe p 190 lt gt Main Dial Mode Dial lock release p 45 button p 45 Shutter button Mode Dial p 24 p 44 A U saimei 53 ae Strap mount elf timer ame Wea p 27 p 115 276 Q D Microphone Remote control p 236 sensor p 188 Grip Battery compartment Lens release button p 40 DC coupler cord hole p 348 Depth of field preview button p 167 Lens lock pin Lens mount Mirror p 186 299 Contacts p 15 Body cap p 39 18 Nomenclature LCD panel p 21 22 lt AF ON gt AF start button p 44 70 201 228 Eyecup p 187 Viewfinder eyepiece A pes lt E gt AF point selection button p 72 lt INFO gt Info button p 60 61 202 227 250 342 Power switch p 34 lt MENU gt Menu button lt Q gt Quick p 51 Control button p 49 Terminal cover a lt 2 gt Quick Date time Contr
258. o focus AF point expansion Manual selection lt The manually selected AF point lt L gt and four surrounding AF points lt gt above below on the left and on the right are used to focus 72 Selecting the AF Area TE AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points The manually selected AF point lt L gt and the surrounding AF points lt 9 gt are used to focus Zone AF Manual selection of zone The 61 AF points are divided into nine zones for focusing 61 point automatic selection AF All the AF points are used to focus This mode is set automatically in the lt Gf gt mode Select the AF Area Selection Mode U fE Select the AF area selection mode Press the lt E gt button Look through the viewfinder and press the lt M Fn gt button gt Press the lt M Fn gt button to switch the AF area selection mode Fil e With AF4 Select AF area selec mode you can limit the selectable AF area selection modes p 101 e If you set AF4 AF area selection method to amp Main Dial you can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the lt E gt button then turning the lt 4 gt dial p 102 13 Selecting the AF Area Selecting the AF Point Manually You can manually select the AF point or zone With 61 point automatic selection AF you can set the starting AF point for Al Servo AF
259. oa oM o 1 Select Record func card folder Record funcecard folder se sel a eee e Under the 1 tab select Record Auto rotate Ong func card folder sel then press Format card lt CE gt Record func card folder sel 2 Select Folder Record func Standard Turn the lt gt dial to select Folder Record play W _ Folder 100E0550 then press lt gt Select folder fi 3 Select Create folder 10060550 33 e Turn the lt gt dial to select Create E folder then press lt gt Select folder i A Create a new folder e Turn the lt gt dial to select OK then press lt gt gt A new folder with the folder number Cancel OK increased by one is created Create folder 102 152 tE Creating and Selecting a Folder Selecting a Folder Lowest file number e With the folder selection screen Number of images displayed turn the lt 3 gt dial to select in folder the desired folder then press lt 6 gt Select folder fi The folder where the captured DENE ioio images will be saved is selected 20 gt Subsequent captured images will be recorded into the selected folder Create folder Folder name Highest file number About Folders As with 100EOS5D for example the folder name starts with three digits the folder number followed by five alphanumeric characters A folder can contain up to 9999 images file number 0001 9999 When a folder becomes full a new
260. oint expansion Manual selection 2 so the focusing is executed over a wider area Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point Al Servo AF and One Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point expansion Manual selection a mode p 75 5 a 3J DE 3 fo o 70 HE 3 E E 3 Oe o o oE Zone AF Manual selection of zone The 61 AF points are divided into nine zones for focusing All the AF points in the selected zone are used for the automatic selection of the point of focus It makes achieving focus easier than with single point AF or AF point expansion and it is effective for moving subjects However since it is inclined to focus the nearest subject focusing a specific target is harder than with single point AF or AF point expansion The AF point s achieving focus is displayed as lt L_ gt HERE fl fl fe Ell Gl amp Hele BIE 76 AF Area Selection Modes 61 point automatic selection AF All the AF points are
261. ol Dial p 46 battery p 349 Touch pad p 46 lt gt Setting 7 button p 51 ial lt MIC gt External microphone IN terminal p 237 lt Q gt Headphone terminal p 237 4 0 lt 4 gt PC terminal p 191 M ni lt A V OUT DIGITAL gt Audio video OUT Digital terminal p 277 302 315 D lt HDMI OUT gt HDMI mini OUT terminal p 274 lt gt Remote control terminal N3 type p 187 A V OUT DIGITAL s D TES e 19 Nomenclature O OS lt gt Focal plane mark Dioptric adjustment knob p 43 lt E m D gt Creative P hoto Comparative playback Two image display Direct print button p 131 175 179 259 307 lt gt Live View shooting Movie shooting switch p 199 219 lt u gt Start Stop button p 200 220 lt gt Multi controller lt RATE gt p 47 Rating button p 261 279 Strap mount lt Q gt Index p 27 Magnify Reduce lt gt Playback e a 1 Card slot button p 250 cover p 31 lt TT gt Erase button p 283 JSS Batter compartment cover release lever p 30 Battery compartment cover p 30 Access lamp p 33 Speaker Light sensor p 285 Se eee eee ee ee ee Be ee LCD monitor p 285 z Multi function lock switch p 47 Pa Tripod socket SD card slot p 31 CF card slot p 31 CF card ejection
262. older to your computer Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied Windows Macintosh EOS Utility EUx xW_E_xx EUx xM_E_xx Digital Photo Professional DPPx xW_E_ xx DPPx xM_E_ xx Picture Style Editor PSEx xW_E_xx PSEx xM_E_xx e Instruction manual for ImageBrowser EX ImageBrowser EX User Guide is included in the software 6 Double click the copied PDF file e Adobe Reader latest version recommended must be installed in your computer e Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet 396 Index _ S SS _ _ _ _ 10 sec or 2 sec delay 115 1280x720 A arenes aattuleiaea tied 233 1920X1080 ac ec ceatebun scarce 233 4 or 9 image index display 255 61 point automatic selection AF 22k ieee 73 77 640x480 os cossesnsseated nananaesceeere Seetes 233 SSS Cire tee 64 220 AC Adapter Kit ee 348 Access IAMDP ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 33 Adobe ROB cece eececanscear 160 PE 01e ccciissvcssonseiseesnaucesssaseadederecaas 173 PAN So ole geen Cainer e 172 321 AF AF area selection mode 72 75 AF gro pr aa 79 AF Microadjustment 0 106 AF AMOOG sv vyuiisctlehG ase raamecette 70 AF point coanietee tie toane terns 72 75 AF point selection 74 332 AF status indicator 64 AF assist beam 99 Beeper ccciaena tc eae suusteeteeientet ee 354 Customization se esseere 96 Difficult
263. om the AF points Effective when there may be an obstacle blocking the subject or when you do not want to focus the background Fl If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the target subject setting Tracking sensitivity to Locked on 2 may give better results p 92 88 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SSS ee ey Case 3 Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points own y Q x Once an AF point starts tracking the a subject this setting enables the camera k Instantly focus on subjects to focus consecutive subjects at different 7 E distances If a new subject appears in t Tracking sensitivity ooo f Accel decel tracking p S n front of the target subject the camera will cy AF pt auto switching oG o s i j UE Help GEMS Detail set start focusing the new subject Also effective when you want to always focus Default settings on the closest subject e Tracking sensitivity Responsive 1 e Accel decel tracking 1 e AF pt auto switching 0 F If you want to quickly focus a subject appearing suddenly setting Tracking sensitivity to 2 may give better results p 92 Case 4 For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly oF Q x Geared for tracking moving subjects fae A AP contig toot ve Case 4 whose speed can change dramatically k For subjects t
264. on method is set to ALL I l only use a CF card with a reading writing speed of at least 30 MB per sec and a SD card with a reading writing speed of at least 20 MB per sec To find out the card s reading writing speed refer to the card manufacturer s Web site p 219 e Ifthe movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting e If the shooting mode is lt 3 P Tv Av B gt the ISO speed will be set automatically In the lt M gt mode you can freely set the ISO speed p 226 ISO 16000 20000 25600 cannot be set for movie shooting Under 32 ISO speed rangel if you set the ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H the maximum ISO speed for manual ISO speed setting will be expanded and then ISO 16000 20000 25600 can be set However since shooting a movie at ISO 16000 20000 256000 may result in much noise it is designated as an expanded ISO speed displayed as H The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting f you shoot a movie when Maximum 25600 is set with ISO speed range and ISO speed is set to ISO 16000 20000 25600 the ISO speed will switch to S012800 during movie shooting with manual exposure Even if you switch back to still photo shooting the ISO speed will not revert to the original setting e If you shoot a movie when 1 L 50 or 2 H1 51200 H2 102400 is set the ISO speed
265. one sheet 20 up Twenty or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size paper 35 up ca e 20 up Fa will have the shooting information imprinted Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings 1 From the Exif data the camera name lens name shooting mode shutter speed aperture B exposure compensation amount ISO speed white balance etc will be imprinted 2 After ordering the prints with Digital Print Order Format DPOF p 311 you should print by following Direct Printing with DPOF p 314 QD If the image s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper s aspect ratio the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a borderless print If the image is cropped it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fewer number of pixels 305 P Printing Se sn A Set the printing effects a 2 Oa e Setif necessary If you do not need to Tia ae set any printing effects go to step 5 Halia aaraa e What is displayed on the screen F Photo Cancel differs depending on the printer B Borderless Print e Select the option then press lt amp gt Select the desired printing effect then press lt amp 1 gt If the lt EI gt icon is displayed brightly next to lt MEA gt you can also adjust the printing effect p 308 FJOn The image will be printed according to the printer s standard colors The image s Exif data is use
266. onnection e Even if your computer already has ImageBrowser EX installed follow the steps below to reinstall ImageBrowser EX It will be updated to the latest version with features optimized for your camera Also the latest functions may be added with the auto update feature e For software other than ImageBrowser EX if a previous version is installed follow the steps below to reinstall the software The newer version will overwrite the previous version 1 Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer e For Macintosh double click to open the CD ROM icon displayed on the desktop then double click on setup 2 Click Easy Installation and follow the on screen instructions to install Ifthe install screen for Microsoft Silverlight is displayed during installation install Microsoft Silverlight 3 Click Restart and remove the CD ROM after the computer restarts When the computer has restarted the installation is complete 395 Software Start Guide ee Software Instruction Manual Software Instruction Manuals are contained on the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk Instructions for copying and viewing the Software Instruction Manual PDFs are as follows 1 Insert the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk into your computer 2 Close the install screen e When the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk install screen appears close the install screen 3 Open the CD ROM 4 Open the Manual folder 5 Copy the English f
267. ons are set to their defaults The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the EF50mm f 1 4 USM or EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM lens as an example Chapters mn For first time DSLR users Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera s basic operations and shooting procedures wWlI IOlOlOIN O MiB lw me me oe oe wi w Introduction Getting Started Basic Shooting Setting the AF and Drive Modes Image Settings Advanced Operations Flash Photography Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting Shooting Movies Image Playback Post Processing Images Sensor Cleaning Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer Customizing the Camera Reference Software Start Guide T 27 63 E co 1B 16 B 189 E 199 E 29 249 E 287 E 205 E 301 B 319 341 E 393 E 5 Contents sn Introduction 2 HOM ORE OK IIS Goiasa paaa AANA EOT k 3 Conventions Used in this Manual ccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenenneeeeeeeeees 4 Sae e E ere re ee Ce Teer rer reer tee ere retry tr rer et tc rr yt 5 Index 10 Feat reS s isureirinarait ineine iaai aaa enei aina 12 Handing FPreca tions ssiccssinisensiiici aa 14 Cuck Siar GUJE ausra i eai a a ER 16 NOMEN GC AGING ius racincancitenteaviansditeteniididundtniunanadeavecowadvieteiiee tundoul 18 1 Getting Started 27 Charging the BAWETY sssstscoicuninsesncentceeitiangidaavanseyiaraducuadsancsineaoeannias 28 Installing and Removing the Battery ees
268. ooking at the LCD panel turn the lt gt dial Q Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely only one shot will be taken Cli High speed continuous shooting Max approx 6 shots sec Cl Low speed continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec While you hold down the shutter button completely shots will be taken continuously OS Silent single shooting The shooting sound for single shooting is quieter than lt L gt ES Silent continuous shooting Max approx 3 shots sec The shooting sound for continuous shooting is quieter than lt H gt 10 sec self timer Remote control 2 2 sec self timer Remote control For self timer shooting see the next page For remote control shooting see page 188 when 1 Record func is set to Rec separately p 118 the maximum burst for continuous shooting will decrease greatly p 123 When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting the continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since shooting will be temporally disabled p 125 114 Using the Self timer TEN QD e If lt OS gt or lt GiS gt is set the time lag from when you press the shutter button completely until the picture is taken will be longer than normal e When the battery level is low the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower e Gin The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx 6 shots sec is attained under the following con
269. oot btn Fe HOMI output LCD No mirroring e Time code You can set the time code For details see pages 239 242 Silent Control When Enable is set you can use the touch pad lt gt and Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie shooting For details see page 238 e Movie shooting button When 4 8 is set besides pressing the lt 8 gt button you can also press the shutter button completely or use Remote Switch RS 80N3 sold separately or Timer Remote Controller TC 80N3 sold separately to start stop the movie shooting p 187 However when M8 is set still photo shooting is not possible p 230 244 M9 Menu Function Settings E E e HDMI output LCD This is for recording the HDMI output image to an external recording device No mirroring is set by default If you set Mirroring the movie displayed on the LCD monitor as it is being recorded can also be displayed from the HDMI output Note that the video from the HDMI output will be displayed without the shooting information or masking for indicating image area output without information overlay through display If No mirroring is set the movie will be displayed on the LCD monitor but if there is HDMI output the LCD monitor will turn off With this setting the movie from the HDMI output will show the shooting information and masking for indicating image area However by pressing the lt INFO gt button you can eliminate th
270. or still subjects e In HDR shooting 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set automatically Therefore even in Tv and M shooting modes the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set e To prevent camera shake the ISO speed may be set higher than usual e f Auto Image Align is set to Enable and the HDR picture is shot handheld the edges of the photos will be cropped lowering the resolution slightly Also if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake etc auto image alignment may not take effect Note that when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings auto image alignment may not work properly e f you perform handheld HDR shooting while Auto Image Align is set to Disable the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR effect may be minimal e Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns lattice stripes etc or flat single tone images e The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly Irregular colors or noise may appear e HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color reproduction of the illuminated areas e With HDR shooting the three images will be merged after you take a picture Therefore it will take a longer time to record the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting During the merging of the images BUSY will be displayed and you cannot take
271. orrected On the upper right Shift indicates the direction and correction amount e Pressing the lt gt button will cancel Bracket all the WB Shift Bkt settings EEEH S Z Shift EE Clear all e Press lt gt to exit the setting and SET j ddata Ns return to the menu El e During the white balance correction lt W8 gt will be displayed on the LCD panel e lt gt can be displayed in the viewfinder when white balance correction is set p 324 One level of the blue amber correction is equivalent to approx 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter Mired Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion filter 142 WB White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot three images having a different color balance can be recorded simultaneously Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting the image will be bracketed with a blue amber bias or magenta green bias This is called white balance bracketing WB BKT White balance bracketing is possible up to 3 levels in single level increments Set the white balance bracketing amount In step 2 for white balance correction when you turn the lt 3 gt dial the m mark on the screen will change to a m m 3 points Turning the dial to the right sets the B A bracketing and turning it to the left sets the M G bracketing gt On the right Bracket
272. osure settings HDR Mode settings 64 Live View shooting Live View shooting AF mode Grid display Aspect ratio Exposure simulation Silent LV shooting Metering timer 64 Movie AF mode Grid display Movie recording size Sound recording Silent LV shooting Metering timer 65 Movie Movie recording count Movie play count Silent Control Movie shooting button HDMI output LCD AF 1 Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 AF 2 Al Servo 1st image priority Al Servo 2nd image priority AF3 USM lens electronic MF AF assist beam firing One Shot AF release priority AF 4 Lens drive when AF impossible Selectable AF point Select B AF area selec mode AF area selection method Orientation linked AF point AF5 Manual AF point selection pattern AF point display during focus VF display illumination 339 Register Custom Shooting Modes U 12 Slide show Image jump with lt 3 13 Highlight alert AF point disp Playback grid Histogram display Movie play count Magnificatn approx 1 File numbering Auto rotate Eye Fi settings 2 Auto power off LCD brightness VF grid display HDMI frame rate 3 Sensor cleaning Auto cleaning MEA button display options button function Bracketing auto cancel Bracketing sequence Number of bracketed shots Safety shift Q My Menu settings will not be registered When the Mode Dial is set to lt W gt lt gt or lt gt you canno
273. otal Recording Time approx File Size Size 4GB Card 8 GB Card 16 GB Card approx Pera fer eee a6 oa ein famn 25 mn ero wim ola ea asmin The 87min Shr 14 min 78 Merin e About Movies Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB you can keep shooting without interruption Approx 30 sec before the movie reaches the 4 GB file size the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed in the movie shooting image will start blinking If you keep shooting the movie and the file size exceeds 4 GB a new movie file will be created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code will stop blinking When you play back the movie you will have to play the individual movie files Movie files cannot play back consecutively automatically After the movie playback ends select the next movie to play e Movie Shooting Time Limit The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min 59 sec If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min 59 sec the movie shooting will stop automatically You can start shooting a movie again by pressing the lt H8Y gt button A new movie file starts being recorded 234 u Setting the Movie Recording Size wD e An increase of the camera s internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the preceding page p 247 e Even if Record func is set to Auto switch card the card cannot be switched automatically duri
274. ound more natural than with Enable 236 M0 Setting the Sound Recording ae e Using the microphone The built in microphone records monaural sound Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external stereo microphone commercially available equipped with a miniature stereo plug 3 5 mm to the camera s external microphone IN terminal p 19 When an external microphone is connected sound recording will switch automatically to the external microphone e Using headphones By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting If you are using an external stereo microphone you can listen to the sound in stereo You can also use headphones during movie playback Q The audio output to the headphones will not have noise reduction applied It B will therefore be different from the sound recorded with the movie El e Inthe lt Gf gt shooting mode Sound recording settings will be On Off If On is set the sound recording level will be adjusted automatically same as with Auto but the wind filter function will not take effect e To adjust the headphones volume press the lt Q gt button then tilt the multi controller up or down while pressing the lt RATE gt button Note that the headphone s volume will not be displayed on the screen Adjust it while listening to the sound e The
275. ovie Shooting E e By connecting stereo headphones commercially available equipped with a 3 5 mm mini plug to the camera s headphone terminal p 19 you can listen to the sound during movie shooting e You can use Remote Controller RC 6 sold separately p 188 to start and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is lt gt or lt 2 gt Set the shooting timing switch to lt 2 gt 2 sec delay then press the transmit button If the switch is set to lt gt immediate shooting still photo shooting will take effect e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 the total movie shooting time will be as follows approx 1 hr 30 min at room temperature 23 C 73 F and approx 1 hr 20 min at low temperatures 0 C 32 F e The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a super telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode marketed since the second half of 2011 Final Image Simulation The final image simulation is a function that allows you to see the effects of the Picture Style white balance etc on the image During movie shooting the image displayed will automatically reflect ie the effects of the settings listed below Final image simulation for movies e Picture Style All settings such as sharpness contrast color saturation and color tone will be reflected White balance White balance correction Exposure Depth of field Auto Lighting Optimizer Peripheral
276. owing AF area selection modes AF point expansion Manual selection a AF point expansion Manual selection surrounding points Zone AF Manual selection 61 point automatic selection AF Standard setting for gradual AF point switching 2 1 Even if the target subject moves dramatically up down left or right and moves away from the AF point the AF point switches to another one to continue focusing the subject The camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus the subject based on the subject s continual movement contrast etc Setting 2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with 1 However with a wide angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the subject is too small in the frame the camera may focus with the wrong AF point 94 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject EE SS SS eee Changing Cases Parameter Settings You can adjust each case s three parameters 1 Tracking sensitivity 2 Accel decel tracking and 3 AF pt auto switching as desired OMAE Q x Select a case pled ee Turn the lt gt dial to select the icon Versatile si purpose of the case you want to adjust oF sening 5 Tracking sensitivity s i s 2 Press the lt RATE gt button Accel decel tracking oY AF pt auto switching amp e The selected case will have a purple Help BB Default set frame k 3 Select the desired item A AP contig toot Case 1
277. pe Depth of field preview Provided Autofocus Type TTL secondary image registration phase detection AF points 61 points Up to 41 cross type points Number of available AF points and cross type points vary depending on the lens Focusing brightness range EV 2 18 with center f 2 8 AF point 23 C 73 F ISO 100 Focus modes One Shot AF Al Servo AF Al Focus AF Manual focusing MF AF area selection modes Single point Spot AF manual selection Single point AF manual selection AF point expansion manual selection up down left and right AF point expansion manual selection surround Zone AF manual selection Auto selection of 61 AF points AF Configuration tool Case 1 6 Al Servo characteristics Tracking sensitivity Acceleration deceleration tracking AF point auto switching 379 Specifications AF fine adjustment AF assist beam e Exposure Control Metering modes Metering range Exposure control ISO speed Recommended exposure index ISO speed settings Exposure compensation AE lock e HDR Shooting Dynamic range adjustment Effect Auto image align e Multiple Exposures Shooting method No of multiple exposures Multiple exposure control 380 AF Microadjustment All lenses by same amount or Adjust by lens Emitted by the EOS dedicated external Speedlite 63 zone TTL full aperture metering Evaluative metering linked to all AF points Partial meterin
278. pixels 3 7 megapixels s mI 2880x1920 2560x1920 2880x1620 1920x1920 5 5 megapixels 4 9 megapixels 4 7 megapixels 3 7 megapixels 1920x1280 1696x1280 1920x1080 1280x1280 2 5 megapixels 2 2 megapixels 2 1 megapixels 1 6 megapixels 720x480 640x480 720x400 480x480 350 000 pixels 310 000 pixels 290 000 pixels 230 000 pixels 206 M9 Menu Function Settings QD e For asterisked image recording quality the pixel count does not exactly match the set aspect ratio e The image area displayed for the asterisked aspect ratio is slightly larger than the recorded area Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting e f you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1 1 aspect ratio the images may not be correctly printed Fil With 9 2 LV shooting area display you can set the display method for the shooting area p 324 e Exposure simulation Exposure simulation displays and simulates how the brightness of the actual image exposure will look e Enable G0 The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness exposure of the resulting image If you set exposure compensation the image brightness will change accordingly During E3 Normally the image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live View image easy to see The image will be displayed close to the actual brightness exposure of the resulting image o
279. play Disable Select Enable i Enable 2 Turn the lt gt dial to select Enable then press lt 6 gt e The grid will be displayed in the viewfinder Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder The viewfinder can display an electronic level using the AF points For details see Custom Controls p 327 ir A grid can also be displayed on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and movie shooting p 205 243 59 Displaying the Grid and Electronic Level a sie the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor Press the lt INFO gt button e Each time you press the lt INFO gt button the screen display will change e Display the electronic level e Ifthe electronic level does not appear set 3 MEA button button display options x Displays camera settings EAC display options so that the E EER ae electronic level can be displayed p 342 OK Cancel 2 Check the camera s tilt e The horizontal and vertical tilt are displayed in 1 increments e When the red line turns green it indicates that the tilt is corrected 4 Se TT A hs Vertical level Horizontal level yy nw QD Even when the tilt is corrected there may be a margin of error of 1 e Ifthe camera is very tilted the electronic level s margin of error will be bigger Fl With this same procedure you can display the electronic level during Live View shooting and
280. play back the captured images In such a case use the provided AV cable to connect to the TV Using HDMI CEC TV Sets If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI CEC you can use the TV set s remote control for playback operations An HDMI standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that you can control them with one remote control unit 1 Set Ctrl over HDMI to Enable e Under the L gt 3 tab select Ctrl over HDMI then press lt gt e Select Enable then press lt gt Disable Ctrl over HDMI I Enable 2 5 Viewing the Images on TV al Connect the camera to a TV set e Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV gt The TV s input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera 3 Press the camera s lt gt gt button gt An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV s remote control to play back images Select an image or movie e Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image Still photo playback menu 5 Press the remote control s Enter button gt wo amp gt The menu appears and you can perform Movie playback menu the playback operations shown on the left Press the lt button to select the oo EY desired option then press the Enter Ea Return button For a slide show press the remote 82 9 image index control
281. played on PN Xe the camera s LCD monitor e To play back movies see page 267 WD e Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided Images may not be displayed if you use a different cable e f the video system format does not match the TV s the images will not be displayed properly Set the proper video system format with Y 3 Video system 2 1 o gt Protecting Images mau Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally M Protecting a Single Image O ary O Select Protect images Protect images e Under the gt 1 tab select Protect Rotate ir i Leslie images then press lt gt Print order Image copy RAW image processing o Protect images 2 Select Select images Select images Select Select images then press All images in folder ze D x Unprotect all images in folder All images on card gt The images will be displayed Unprotect all images on card ME NU Ba Image protect icon 3 Protect the image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be protected then press lt G1 gt gt The image will be protected and the lt e gt icon will appear at the top of the screen e To cancel the image protection press lt gt again The lt gt icon will disappear e To protect another image repeat step 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu 2 8 o gt Protecting Images ee eee
282. plied to subsequent shots e You can also use a remote controller sold separately p 188 for Live View shooting 200 C3 Shooting with the LCD Monitor ey Enabling Live View Shooting Ear on Set 434 Live View shoot to Enable EUGENE Goes In the lt 3 gt mode it is displayed under Disable 62 Battery Life with Live View Shooting Approx number of shots At 23 C 73F At 0 C 32 F Possible shots 200 e The figures above are based on a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 and CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association testing standards e With a fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 continuous Live View shooting is possible for approx 1 hr 30 min at 23 C 73 F Q e Do not point the camera toward an intense light source such as the sun on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera s internal components e Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 217 218 Fl e You can also focus by pressing the lt AF ON gt button e When flash is used there will be two shutter sounds but only one shot will be taken e Ifthe camera is not operated for a prolonged period the power will turn off automatically as set with 2 Auto power off p 55 If 2 Auto power off is set to Disable Live View shooting will end automatically after 30 min camera power remains on e With the stereo AV cable provided or HDMI cable sold separately you
283. pointed up or down the image may not be rotated automatically for playback e If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the personal computer screen it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image Using the provided software is recommended 286 10 Post Processing Images You can process RAW images with the camera or resize shrink JPEG images e A x icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt 3 gt mode 4 e The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera e Post processing images as described in this chapter is not possible if the camera is set for HDR shooting or multiple exposures or while it is connected to a personal computer via the lt DIGITAL gt terminal RAW Processing RAW Images with the Camera m You can process images with the camera and save them as JPEG images While the RAW image itself does not change you can process the RAW image according to different conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it Note that M and S images cannot be processed with the camera Use Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 to process those images O ar MMe Oo amp 1 Select RAW image processing Protect images e Under the L gt 1 tab select RAW Rotate image i i Eraso ines image processing then
284. ppend Dust Delete Data gt p 297 13 Handling Precautions mE Camera Care e This camera is a precision instrument Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock e The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater If you accidentally drop the camera into water promptly consult your nearest Canon Service Center Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth If the camera has been exposed to salty air wipe it with a well wrung wet cloth e Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data e Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction e The camera contains precision electronic circuitry Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself e Do not block the mirror operation with your finger etc Doing so may cause a malfunction e Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens viewfinder reflex mirror and focusing screen Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens For stubborn dirt take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center e Do not touch the camera s electrical contacts with your fingers This is to prevent the contacts from corroding Corroded contacts
285. pper left e To select other images to be erased repeat step 3 A Erase the images e Press the lt j gt button e Select OK then press lt gt gt The selected images will be erased uam Erasing All Images in a Folder or Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at one time When L gt 1 Erase images is set to All images in folder or All images on card all the images in the folder or card will be erased Fl e To also erase protected images format the card p 53 When All images on card is selected the images will be erased on the card selected under 1 Record func card folder sel with Record play Playback 284 Changing Image Playback Settings sx uam Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness The LCD monitor s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum viewing You can set the automatic adjustment s brightness level brighter or darker or adjust the brightness manually 1 Select LCD brightness Under the 2 tab select LCD Auto h n or Z D Date Time Zone 01 11 12 13 30 brightness t en press E LCD brightness 2 Select Auto or Manual E Kg Turn the lt g gt dial to make the a pana selection 3 Adjust the brightness While referring to the gray chart turn the lt gt dial then press lt gt e You can adjust Auto to one of three levels and Manual to one of seven levels LCD brightness LCD brightness Pet d fc
286. pplied and the final multiple exposure image will look less noisy e Average Based on the No of exposures negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures If you shoot multiple exposures of the same scene the exposure of the subject s background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard exposure If you want to change the exposure of each single exposure select Additive e Bright Dark The brightness or darkness of the base image and the images to be added are compared at the same position and then the bright or dark part will be left in the picture Depending on the overlapping colors the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness or darkness ratio of the compared images Multiple exposure Set the No of e xposu res e Turn the lt gt dial to select the No of exposures 2 number of exposures then press lt G1 gt e You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures 180 Multiple Exposures SS Multiple exposure 6 Set the images to be saved e To save all the single exposures and the merged multiple exposure image Save source imgs _ gt All images select All images then press lt gt Result only e To save only the merged multiple exposure image select Result only then press lt gt Select image for multi expo Multiple exposure 7 Set Continue Mult exp Select either 1 shot only or Continuously then press lt amp gt l 1
287. priority Equal priority is given to focusing and o m shutter release ee XC Release priority ras Wc A soe aE Pressing the shutter button takes the MZ Help SET OK picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved This gives priority to getting the shot rather than achieving correct focus Focus priority Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus has been achieved Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot 96 tM Customizing AF Functions EE Al Servo 2nd image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter release timing during continuous shooting after the first shot with Al Servo AF Al servo 2nd image priority D O Equal priority Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed In low light or with low contrast subjects shooting Release timing after 1st img in Al servo AF continuous shooting speed may slow down EES Help SET Tals CH Shooting speed priority Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of achieving focus The continuous shooting speed does not slow down Convenient when you want to maintain the continuous shooting speed Focus priority Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous shooting speed The picture is not taken until focus is achieved Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing the shot 97 tM Customizing AF Functions Ea
288. purchased the product VAN Warnings Follow the warnings below Otherwise death or serious injuries may result e To prevent fire excessive heat chemical leakage explosions and electrical shock follow the safeguards below e Do not use any batteries power sources or accessories not specified in the Instruction Manual Do not use any home made or modified batteries Do not short circuit disassemble or modify the battery Do not apply heat or solder to the battery Do not expose the battery to fire or water Do not subject the battery to strong physical shock Do not insert the battery s plus and minus ends incorrectly Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient temperature range Also do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the Instruction Manual Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera accessories connecting cables etc e When disposing of a battery insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent contact with other metallic objects or batteries This is to prevent a fire or an explosion e f excessive heat smoke or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging Otherwise it may cause a fire heat damage or electrical shock e If the battery leaks changes color deforms or emits smoke or fumes remove it immediately Be careful not to get bur
289. r button or other E buttons 1 Select Auto power off e Under the 2 tab select Auto power off then press lt gt 2 Set the desired time Select the desired setting then press lt G1 gt F Even if Disable is set the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30 min to save power The camera s power does not turn off Disable uam Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture To keep the image displayed set Hold To not have the image displayed set Off Select Image review Under the 1 tab select Image review then press lt gt Image review Set the desired time Select the desired setting then press lt G1 gt F If Hold is set the image will be displayed until the auto power off time elapses 55 Before You Start M Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings The camera s shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults O a oeM o x 1 Select Clear all camera settings i e SET UPA Custom shooting mode C1 C3 Under the 4 tab select Clear all Cear all camera settings i T EEE camera settings then press lt 1 gt firmware ver 1 0 0 Clear all camera settings 2 Select OK Select OK then press lt gt gt Setting Clear all camera settings will reset the camera to the following default settings Clear al
290. r if you use an Extension tube Setting it to Mode 1 or Mode 2 will result in incorrect or irregular exposures QD e f you use flash silent shooting will not be possible regardless of the Silent LV shoot setting e When using a non Canon flash unit set it to Disable The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 e f Mode 2 is set and you use remote control shooting p 188 the operation will be the same as with Mode 1 Fl With the TS E17mm f 4L or TS E24mm f 3 5L II lens you can use Mode 1 or Mode 2 e Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed AE lock time Fl If you select 3 Dust Delete Data 3 Sensor cleaning Y 4 Clear all camera settings or Y 4 Firmware Ver the Live View shooting will be terminated 208 Using AF to FOCUS mE Selecting the AF Mode The AF modes available are Live mode 1X Live mode face detection p 210 and Quick mode p 214 If you want to achieve precise focus set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt magnify the image and focus manually p 216 t 2 Select the AF mode e Under the 84 tab select AF eta mode In the lt 7 gt mode it is Quick mode displayed under 92 e While the Live View image is displayed you can press the lt AF DRIVE gt button to select the AF mode on the setting screen displayed Live Mode AM The image sensor is used to focus Although AF is pos
291. r settings sssseeeneeeeeeeee 305 Print Order DPOF 311 Printing CM OGts sicaccvwscvecncseenede 306 Tilt correction ceceeeeeeeeeees 309 HEMRATUNG 5 ss csceccacteceseernttenesecs ss 309 Program AE sses 162 220 Program SIUM vissesstaveecessnrccaceshs 163 Protect image erase protection 278 Ol eerie heen ees 49 204 232 263 Quick Control 49 204 232 263 Quick Control Dial ccccceee 46 Quick mode AF cccccceceeeeeeeees 214 402 Rating IVAN oaeetsnccainaitls deer ebbbuta 261 PAW e a cae seene 121 124 RAW image processing 288 RAWFJPE G enient 121 Rec separately ee 119 Rec to multiple eee 119 PICCHIALGS Vukveccctcteacetaclal yout naan 28 Record TUNG wets essary 118 Recording level a se 236 Reduced display 20 255 257 Registering and using an AF pOint 330 Release shutter without card 32 Remote control shooting 188 Remote switch shooting 187 RESIZE eae e EEEa 293 Rotate image 260 286 309 So Safety precautions s 389 Safety shift scccccrsecenseconsccdacvesszeneness 323 Saturation eee eee eee 135 SD SDHC SDXC card Card Second curtain synchronization 196 Self t MEer cece cceeceeeeeeeeeeees 115 188 Sensor cleaning ceeeeeee 295 Sepia Monochrome 00008 136 DHALONSS Seinen teactunrerreiad aerate 135
292. r the 2 tab select Color space then press lt gt Set the desired color space Select SRGB or Adobe RGB then press lt amp gt SRGB Color space Adobe AGE About Adobe RGB This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses This setting is not recommended if you do not know about image processing Adobe RGB and Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher The image will look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2 0 Exif 2 21 or higher Post processing of the image with software will therefore be required Fl e Ifthe captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space the first character in the file name will be an underscore _ e The ICC profile is not appended Refer to explanations about the ICC profile in the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual p 396 160 Inthe P Tv Av M B shooting modes you can select the shutter speed aperture and other camera settings to change the exposure and obtain the desired result e Ax icon at the upper right of a page title indicates that the function can be used when the Mode Dial is set to lt P Tv Av M B gt The function cannot be used in the lt J gt mode e After you press the shutter button halfway and let go the exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD pan
293. r to the Speedlite s Toft O EAEE instruction manual ERa 1 1 5 e Flash exposure bracketing padi eposu braden While the flash output is changed automatically three shots are taken For details on FEB Flash Exposure Bracketing refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual FERES QD When using second curtain synchronization set the shutter speed to 1 25 sec or slower If the shutter speed is 1 30 sec or faster first curtain synchronization will be applied even if Second curtain synchronization is set E e By selecting Clear flash settings you can revert the flash settings to their defaults e With an EX series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings you can only set the following Flash firing E TTL II meter and Flash exposure compensation under Flash function settings Shutter synchronization can also be set with certain EX series Speediites e If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite you cannot set the flash exposure compensation on the camera with the lt ISO amp 4 gt button or flash function settings If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite the Speedlite s setting overrides the camera s 197 TEM Setting the Flash EE aE TaT Tr T T T OOE Flash Custom Function Settings For details on the Speedlite s Custom Functions refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual External Speedlite control Select Flash C Fn settings Hash firin
294. re cannot be taken Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically or focus manually p 44 113 The card cannot be used e fa card error message is displayed see page 33 or 377 An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another camera e Cards with capacities greater than 128 GB are formatted in exFAT This means that if you format a card with a capacity over 128 GB with this camera and then insert it into another camera an error may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card The image is out of focus Set the lens focus mode switch to lt AF gt p 39 To prevent camera shake press the shutter button gently p 43 44 If the lens has an Image Stabilizer set the IS switch to lt ON gt p 42 In low light the shutter soeed may become slow Use a faster shutter speed p 164 set a higher ISO speed p 126 use flash p 190 or use a tripod 366 Troubleshooting Guide There are fewer AF points e Depending on the attached lens the number of usable AF points and patterns will differ The lenses are categorized into eight groups from A to H Check which group your lens belongs to Using a lens in Groups F to H will have fewer usable AF points p 79 The AF point is blinking When you press the lt E gt button the blinking AF points are those that are not cross type AF points and are only horizontal line sensitive The AF points that light up are cross type AF
295. reless functions Wireless multiple flash shooting is possible with radio or optical Wireless Off transmission For details on wireless OFF o w flash refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Flash zoom Flash coverage Flash zoom With Speedlites having a zooming flash ne head you can set the flash coverage Won y s3 ss g Normally set this to AUTO so that the 70 8 105 135 200 camera will automatically set the flash coverage to match the lens focal length e Shutter synchronization Shutter synchronization Normally set this to First curtain synchronization so that the flash fires First curtain synchronization immediately after the exposure starts gt gt BB If Second curtain synchronization is set the flash will fire right before the shutter closes When this is combined with a slow shutter speed you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night With Second curtain synchronization two flashes will be fired Once when you press the shutter button completely and once immediately before the exposure ends lf High speed synchronization is set the flash can be used at all shutter speeds This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash when you want to give priority to the aperture setting 196 TEW Setting the Flash E e Flash exposure compensation Na eposie compensation The same setting as Flash exposure compensation on page 190 can be set For details refe
296. remote controller sold separately p 188 for bulb exposures When you press the remote controller s transmit button the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec later Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure 174 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting m You can take artistic photos having a high dynamic range and preserving detail in highlight and shadow areas HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still life shots With HDR shooting three images of different exposures standard exposure underexposure and overexposure are captured for each shot and then merged together automatically The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image HDR stands for High Dynamic Range HDR Shooting 1 Press the lt E gt button 2 Select the HDR mode Turn the lt gt dial to select HDR then press lt 6 gt gt The HDR mode screen will appear HDR Mode 3 Set Adjust dyn range Ajust dyn range Disable HOR Select the desired dynamic range STEV setting then press lt gt 2 EV Selecting Auto will have the dynamic range 3 EV set automatically the image s overall tonal range e The higher the number the wider the dynamic range will be HOR Mode e To disable HDR shooting select Disable HDR Effect Natural Art standard ai re A Set Effect Art bold Select the desired effect then press Art embossed lt GE gt 4D e The HDR mode cannot be set if you us
297. remove the CF card push the eject button To remove the SD card push it in gently and release it Then pull it out e Pull the card straight out then close the cover QD e When the access lamp is lit or blinking it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card being erased or data is being transferred Do not open the card slot cover during this time Also never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking Otherwise it can damage the image data card or camera e Removing the card e Removing the battery e Shaking or banging the camera around e Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 156 e f acard related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor remove and reinsert the card If the error persists use a different card If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera p 53 The card may then return to normal e Do not touch the SD card s contacts with your fingers or metal objects 33 Turning on the Power mx If you turn on the power switch and the Date Time Zone setting screen appears see page 36 to set the Date Time Zone lt ON gt The camera turns on lt OFF gt The camera is turned off and does not operate Set to this position when not using the camera About the Automatic Self Cleaning Sensor
298. respective shooting function When AMD is set you can press the lt E gt button to select the AF area selection mode and AF point The procedure is the same as with viewfinder shooting Note that the lt gt metering mode cannot be set Q Quick Control While the Live View image is displayed you can press the lt Q gt button to set the Auto Lighting Optimizer card selection recording function and image recording quality lr 1 Press the lt Q gt button f gt The settable functions will be displayed N e Standard 2 Select a function and set it e Use lt 5 gt to select a function The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt gt or lt s gt dial to set it e To set the recording function press lt gt then turn the lt gt or lt s gt dial to set it 204 7219 Menu Function Settings m Oo a o a Function settings particular to Live View iG Lk shooting are explained here The menu AF mode Live mode options under the 84 tab are Grid display Off Aet a 33 explained on pages 205 208 In the Expo simulation Enable lt gt mode it is displayed under 32 apaa arah The functions settable on this menu Metering timer 16 sec screen only apply during Live View shooting These functions do not take effect during viewfinder shooting e Live View shooting You can set Live View shooting to Enable or Disable e AF mod
299. ress lt 1 gt With displayed turn the lt gt dial to change the order then press lt 6 gt e Delete item items and Delete all items You can delete any of the registered items Delete item items deletes one item at a time and Delete all items deletes all B registered items e Display from My Menu When Enable is set the X tab will be displayed first when you display the menu screen 337 Register Custom Shooting Modes mums You can register current camera settings such as the shooting mode menu functions and Custom Function settings as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial s lt W gt lt gt and lt l gt positions 1 Select Custom shooting mode Custom shooting mode C1 03 C1 C3 Clear all camera settings amrih informetion Under the 4 tab select Custom E firmware ver 1 0 0 shooting mode C1 C3 then press lt gt 2 Select Register settings ZECE e Turn the lt gt dial to select Register Clear settings Auto update set Disable Register settings 3 Register the Custom shooting mode Select the Custom shooting mode e Turn the lt gt dial to select the to register settings to h Custom shooting mode to be settings then press lt gt Custom shooting mode C1 l Custom shooting mode C2 registered then press lt gt Custom shooting made C3 On the confirmation dialog select OK and press lt gt gt The current camera
300. ress lt gt Display images one by one Jump 10 images Jump 100 images Display by date Display by folder Display movies only Display stills only Display by image rating p 261 Turn the lt gt dial to select the rating Image jump Wi Jump 10 images AAR oO O aani AARAA 3 Browse by jumping e Press the lt L gt gt button to play back images On the single image display turn the lt gt dial Playback position Fl e To search images according to the shooting date select Date e To search images according to folder select Folder e If the card contains both movies and still photos select Movies or Stills to display only either ones e Ifno images match the selected Rating you cannot browse through the images with the lt gt dial 206 Q Magnified View ma You can magnify a captured image by approx 1 5x to 10x on the LCD monitor J 1 Magnify the image The image can be magnified during image playback single image display during image review after image capture and from shooting ready state Press the lt Q gt button gt The magnified view will appear The magnified area and 3 Q will be displayed on the lower right of the screen The image magnification increases as you turn the lt s7 3 gt dial clockwise You can magnify the image up to 10x The image magnification decreases as
301. rol 193 Flash exposure compensation 190 Flash sync speed eeeeeeee 191 Manual flash oaiae 195 Shutter synchronization 1st 2nd curtain ccceeeeee 196 Wireles S a artean 196 Flash exposure bracketing 197 Flash exposure compensation 190 197 Flash IMOGCS Sante ssecemmntanniensuaies 195 Flash sync Contacts 0 cee 18 Focus confirmation light 64 FOCUS IOCK ene aannaaien 67 Focus mode switch 39 113 216 Focusing gt AF Folder Create Select 00006 152 Format card initialization 53 Framerate nrerin 233 246 Full Auto Scene Intelligent Auto 64 F l UD rrarena 233 235 Full High Definition Full HD 233 265 274 Ss Grid display 59 205 243 251 C AD eare e pentane eane te 233 274 HDMI 241 245 246 265 274 FID MG pecs asec cecee tees 275 PUD Fis PE AEA 175 Headphones ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 237 High ISO speed noise reduction 145 High Definition HD 233 265 274 Highlight alert s an 253 Highlight detail loss ee 253 Highlight tone priority 000 148 Histogram Brightness RGB 254 Hot Sh0e i eeeteietsteas ee aes 190 Household power nsss 348 E ICC profile asian le ohne Cone ccs 160 Illumination LCD panel 48 Image AF point display 253 Auto playback s 271 Auto rotate a 286 COPYING ia eric ienn
302. roubleshooting Guide The file name s first character is an underscore _ Set the color space to sRGB If Adobe RGB is set the first character will be an underscore p 160 The fourth character in the file name changes e With 1 File name select the camera s unique file name or the file name registered under User setting 1 p 154 The file numbering does not start from 0001 e Ifthe card already contains recorded images the image number may not start from 0001 p 156 The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect e The correct date and time has not been set p 36 Check the time zone and daylight savings time p 37 The date and time is not in the picture e The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting information When printing you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information p 307 311 is displayed e Ifthe card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera can display will be displayed p 262 In the viewfinder the AF point display speed is slow In low temperatures the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the AF point display device s liquid crystal characteristics The display speed will return to normal at room temperature 373 Troubleshooting Guide The LCD monitor does not display a clear im
303. s Shooting mode registered under the Mode Dial s and p 142 143 WB Shift Bkt 0 0 40 p 160 Color temperature Sm E p 141 Transfer of some Long exp noise reduction images failed High ISO speed NR File name BE3B p 146 Possible shots Freespace p 145 E 999 7 81 GB 9997 72 GB p 154 p 32 123 C a This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed 342 INFO Button Functions _ _ ed Shooting Settings White balance correction Aperture Shutter speed AE lock Flash exposure compensation Shooting mode g ISO speed Exposure level te indicator I AATA eE Reale PGR Highlight tone priority Cte emer ea Custom Controls Picture Style mE We Eoo L AF mode ZET E E ES IMage recording quality Quick Control icon m rae ENIRE Possible shots H SaNETY GORGE Remaining number of White balance exposures multiple Eye Fi card transmission status exposures Metering mode Card indicator Flash ready FE lock Card selection icon High speed sync Multiple exposures HDR Drive mode Auto Lighting Optimizer e Pressing the lt Q gt button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings p 49 e f you press the lt ISO amp A gt lt AF DRIVE gt lt WB gt or lt EJ gt button the respective setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt g gt or lt 3 gt dial to set the function You can also select the AF poin
304. s Example Blue sky solid color walls etc Subjects in very low light e Extremely backlit or reflective subjects Example Car with a highly reflective body etc e Near and far subjects covered by an AF point Example Animal in a cage etc e Repetitive patterns Example Skyscraper windows computer keyboards etc In such cases do either of the following 1 With One Shot AF focus on an object at the same distance as the subject and lock the focus before recomposing p 67 2 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt and focus manually p 113 Fl For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with Live mode Live mode during Live View shooting see page 213 112 When Autofocus Fails MF Manual Focusing 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt gt lt M FOCUS gt will be displayed on the LCD panel Focus the subject Focus by turning the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder E When you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually the focus confirmation light lt gt will light up when focus is achieved e With 61 point automatic selection when the center AF point achieves focus the focus confirmation light lt gt will light up 113 Selecting the Drive Mode mau Single and continuous drive modes are provided 1 Press the lt AF DRIVE gt button 46 2 Select the drive mode While l
305. s a movie On the index display the perforations on the left edge of the image indicates a movie AS movies cannot be played on the index display press lt 1 gt to switch to the single image display 3 On the single image display press lt 61 gt gt The movie playback panel will appear on the bottom b lI M4 ll le Play back the movie Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select P Play then press lt gt gt The movie will start playing e You can pause the movie playback by pressing lt gt e During movie playback you can adjust the sound volume by turning the lt s gt dial For more details on the playback procedure see the next page DE Canon O E Speaker D Before listening to a movie through headphones tone down the volume to prevent hurting your ears 267 m Playing Movies S Exit gt Play gt Slow motion 4il Previous frame gt gt Last frame mm ss hh mm ss ff will Volume Playback Description Returns to the single image display Pressing lt gt toggles between play and stop Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the lt gt dial The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right Displays the movie s first frame Each time you press lt 6 gt the previous frame is displayed If you hold down lt 7 gt it will rewind the movie Each time you press lt gt the movi
306. s no polarity You can connect any sync cord regardless of its polarity Cautions for Live View shooting If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set B 4 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 208 The flash will not fire if it is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 191 4 Flash Photography QD e Ifthe camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result e Do not connect to the camera s PC terminal any flash unit requiring 250 V or more e Do not attach a high voltage flash unit on the camera s hot shoe It may not fire F A flash unit attached to the camera s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to the PC terminal can both be used at the same time 192 mW Setting the Flash memm With an EX series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings you can use the camera s menu screen to set the Speedlite s functions and Custom Functions Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite For details on the Speedlite s functions refer to the Speedlite s instruction manual Oa E Bl k 1 Select External Speedlite Image quality control appel re e Under the 61 tab select External ep Enable Release shutter without card ON Speedlite control then press lt GE gt o sattui i nn gt The external Speedlite control screen External Speedlite contral
307. s possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable W Dual cross type AF point Subject nn qe tracking is superior and the focusing eee H Ha precision is higher than with other AF mip ing f f gn O i cae points E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved CL AF points sensitive to horizontal lines EF14mm f 2 8L USM EF20mm f 2 8 USM EF28mm f 2 8 IS USM EF14mm f 2 8L Il USM EF24mm f 2 8 EF24 70mm f 2 8L USM EF15mm f 2 8 Fisheye EF24mm f 2 8 IS USM Group C Autofocusing with 61 points is possible All of the AF area selection modes are selectable E Cross type AF point Subject tracking is superior and high precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines OOOO OOOO SRE0088 SSR 88 fe a a oooga ooga 80 Lenses and Usable AF Points EF50mm f 2 5 Compact Macro TS E24mm f 3 5L EF200mm f 2L IS USM Extender EF2x EF100mm f 2 8 Macro TS E24mm f 3 5L Il EF8 15mm f 4L Fisheye USM EF100mm f 2 8L Macro IS USM EF200mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF1 4x EF16 35mm f 4L IS USM EF300mm f 4L USM EF200mm f 2 8L II USM Extender EF1 4x EF17 40mm f 4L USM EF300mm f 4L IS USM EF300mm f 2 8L USM Extender EF 1 4x EF24 70mm f 4L IS USM EF400mm f 4 DO IS USM EF300mm f 2 8L IS USM Extender EF 1 4x EF24 105mm f 4L IS USM EF400mm f 4 DO IS II USM EF300mm f 2
308. settings p 339 340 will be registered under the Mode Dial s C position Automatic Updating If you change a setting while you shoot in the lt gt lt gt or lt gt mode the Custom shooting mode can be automatically updated to reflect the changed setting s To enable this automatic update in step 2 set Auto update set to Enable The settings that can be automatically updated are listed on pages 339 and 340 Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes In step 2 if you select Clear settings the respective Mode Dial position will revert to the default setting effective before you registered the camera settings The procedure is the same as step 3 338 Register Custom Shooting Modes i Ss as oe Settings Registered Shooting functions Shooting mode exposure setting ISO speed AF mode AF area selection mode AF point Metering mode Drive mode Exposure compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount e Menu functions e431 Image quality Image review Beep Release shutter without card Lens aberration correction Peripheral illumination correction Chromatic aberration correction External Speedlite control Mirror lockup e432 Exposure compensation AEB ISO speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer White balance Custom White Balance White balance Shift Bracketing Color space e493 Picture Style Long exp noise reduction High ISO speed NR Highlight tone priority Multiple exp
309. shot only e With 1 shot only the setting in step 3 Continue Mute _Continugussy will be set automatically to Disable Multiple exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends e With Continuously multiple exposure shooting continues until the setting in step 3 is set to Disable 8 Take the first exposure gt When On Func Ctrl is set the Select image for multi expo P 1 125 F5 6 100 salty ec captured image will be displayed a dL gt The lt gt icon will blink e The number of remaining exposures m3 514 is displayed in brackets in the viewfinder or on the screen e Pressing the lt L gt gt button enables you to view the captured image p 184 Remaining number of exposures QD e During multiple exposure shooting Auto Lighting Optimizer highlight tone priority peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will be disabled e The image recording quality ISO speed Picture Style high ISO speed noise reduction and color space etc set for the first single exposure will also be set for the subsequent exposures e Ifthe Picture Style is Auto the Standard Picture Style will be set for shooting 181 Multiple Exposures 9 Shoot subsequent exposures gt 182 When On Func Ctrl is set the merged multiple exposure image will be displayed With Live View shooting the multiple exposure images merged so far will be displa
310. sible with the Live View image displayed the AF operation will take longer than with the Quick mode Also achieving focus may be more difficult than with the Quick mode m1 Display the Live View image e Press the lt gt button The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor gt The AF point lt L gt will appear Fesi ani 2 Move the AF point AF point You can use lt gt to move the AF point to where you want to focus It cannot go to the edges of the picture e Pressing lt gt straight down will return the AF point to the image center 209 Using AF to Focus Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt When focus is achieved the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound gt If focus is not achieved the AF point will turn orange Take the picture Check the focus and exposure then press the shutter button completely to take the picture p 200 X Face detection Live Mode AF With the same AF method as the Live mode human faces are detected and focused Have the target person face the camera eS F S pete gia Garo 210 1 Display the Live View image Press the lt gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor e When a face is detected the lt gt frame will appear over the face to be focused e f multiple faces are detected lt
311. sing MF Olololololo O AF Configuration Tool OO Oe Oey Cel AF Microadjustment O O0 0 O Wih ati except Gr Metering Evaluative metering O 1Oo lolo lo mode Metering mode selection OloOolololo Program shift O AE lock OIOJO Exposure Exposure compensation AN pone be AEB OCF Oa Depth of field preview Spee aneri Sain Single shooting CY 3s NS O High speed continuous shooting OC O O O O0O O0O O Low speed continuous shooting O IoOolIololoIlIoO O Drive Silent single shooting OIOlIOoOlIOIOoOITIO O Silent continuous shooting O IOIOIOIOTO O i 10 sec Fs G EN ED SS O i 2 2 sec OF FOR OtE eae oa ibe On External Be O O C O O Speedlite Flash exposure compensation Ololololo Live View shooting OlIlololololoO Aspect ratio OlIOIOlIOIO Quick Control oOlololololo O 3 In the lt M gt mode with Auto ISO you can set a fixed ISO speed 4 Works only before the start of movie shooting 5 Settable only for Live View shooting 353 Menu Settings For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting 3 Shooting 1 Red Page M S AL AL AM AM 4S AS S2 83 Image review Off 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Hold Beep Enable Disable Disable EP shutter Enable Disable without card Image quality Lens aberration Peripheral illumination Enable Disable correction Chromatic aberration Enable Disable Flash firing E TTL II metering Flash sync External Speedlite speed in Av mode
312. sonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC rules Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual If such changes or modifications should be made you could be required to stop operation of the equipment Canon U S A Inc One Canon Park Melville NY 11747 U S A Tel No 1 800 OK CANON 1 800 652 2666 391 CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B When connecting to
313. sound volume balance between L left and R right cannot be adjusted e The 48 kHz sampling frequency will be 16 bit recordings for both L and R e If 5 Silent Control is set to Enable p 238 you can adjust the sound recording level with the lt gt touch pad to reduce the operation noise during movie shooting 23 M Silent Control me This function is convenient when you want to change the ISO speed sound recording level etc silently while shooting a movie silent Control When 85 Silent Control is set to Enable Ideal for Enable you can use the touch pad quiet operation when lt gt on the inner ring of the Quick shooting movies Tap i rear Y Control Dial In the lt G 3 gt mode this function is displayed in 33 Enable i Disable You can just touch the top bottom left or right of lt gt for silent operation During movie shooting you can press the lt Q gt to display the Quick Control screen and change the settings below with lt gt Settable Shooting Mode Functions P B Tv Av M 1 Shutter speed O O 2 Aperture O O 3 ISO speed z O 4 Exposure O O O E compensation 5 Sound O O 0 a recording level QD e If t25 Silent Control is set to Enable you cannot adjust the sound recording level with the lt 3 gt Quick Control dial during movie shooting Even if you cha
314. ss e Turn the lt gt dial to select a piep 5 parameter such as Sharpness then Color tone press lt G gt Default set 134 31 Customizing a Picture Style ee Detail set P Portrait 5 Set the parameter Sharpness Be e Turn the lt gt dial to set the parameter as desired then press lt gt Picture Style e Press the lt MENU gt button to save the panai adjusted parameters The Picture 03002060 Style selection screen will reappear P Bel Bee gt Any settings different from the default na ei Fed Feed will be displayed in blue EEA Detail set SET j Parameter Settings and Effects Sharpness 0 Less sharp outline 7 Sharp outline Contrast 4 Low contrast 4 High contrast 4 Low saturation 4 High saturation amp Color tone 4 Reddish skin tone 4 Yellowish skin tone gI e By selecting Default set in step 4 you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings e To use the adjusted Picture Style first select the adjusted Picture Style then shoot 135 31 Customizing a Picture Style Monochrome Adjustment For Monochrome you can also set Filter effect and Toning effect in addition to Sharpness and Contrast explained on the preceding page Filter Effect Detail set Ezi Monochrome With a filter effect applied to a IN None monochrome image you can make Ye Yellow white clo
315. t dials to select the AF point The lt s gt dial selects an AF point in the horizontal direction and the lt gt dial selects an AF point in the vertical direction A Focus the subject e Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway gt The Live View image will turn off the reflex mirror will go back down and AF will be executed No picture is taken gt When focus is achieved the beeper will sound and the Live View image will reappear gt The AF point used to focus will light 175 36 ar a sig Gi 100 up in green If focus is not achieved the AF point will blink in orange WO 5 Take the picture gt Check the focus and exposure then ae press the shutter button completely to Si take the picture p 200 eo 1 1s 56 eS 1 Sta Bi gl You cannot take a picture during autofocusing Take the picture while the Live View image is displayed 215 Focusing Manually sx You can magnify the image and focus precisely with manual focus 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to lt MF gt e Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly Move the magnifying frame e Use lt gt to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want to focus e Pressing lt 5 gt straight down will return the magnifying frame to the image center Magnify the image e Press the lt Q gt button
316. t Format Record func card folder sel File numbering Continuous card then press lt E gt File name Auto rotate ay LL Format card Format card 2 Select the card _ ee e LJ is the CF card and D is the SD card Turn the lt gt dial to select the card then press lt 6 gt Format card 3 Select OK Format card e Select OK then press lt gt delle cued gt The card will be formatted 7 76 GB used 7 81 GB gt When the formatting is completed the menu will reappear Cancel ok 7 76 GA used 7 81 GB e When B is selected low level Re ee formatting is possible p 54 Cancel OK For low level formatting press the lt T gt button to append Low level format with a lt V gt checkmark then select OK 53 Before You Start si z9 Format the card in the following cases e The card is new e The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer The card is full with images or data e A card related error is displayed p 377 About Low level Formatting e Do low level formatting if the SD card s recording or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card Since low level formatting will erase all recordable sectors in the SD card the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting e You can stop the low level formatting by selecting Cancel Even in this case normal formatting will
317. t may start blinking This blinking icon is a warning that movie shooting will soon end automatically If this happens you will not be able to shoot again until the camera s internal temperature decreases Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the lt M gt and lt i gt icons to appear earlier When you are not shooting turn off the camera Recording and Image Quality e If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary you should set the IS switch to lt OFF gt e The camera s built in microphone will also pick up camera operation noise Using a commercially available external microphone can prevent or reduce these noises from being recorded e Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera s external microphone IN terminal e If there is a very bright light source in the picture the bright area may appear black on the LCD monitor In movies the bright areas will be recorded in almost the same way you see it on the LCD monitor e In low light noise or irregular colors may appear in the image In movies the bright areas w
318. t the darker the image And the more pixels there are toward the right the brighter the image If there are too many pixels on the left the shadow detail will be lost And if there are too many pixels on the Bright image right the highlight detail will be lost The gradation in between will be reproduced By checking the image and its brightness histogram you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation RGB Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color s brightness level in the image RGB or red green and blue The horizontal axis indicates the color s brightness level darker on the left and brighter on the right while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level The more pixels there are toward the left the darker and less prominent the color And the more pixels there are toward the right the brighter and denser the color If there are too many pixels on the left the respective color information will be lacking And if there are too many pixels on the right the color will be too saturated with no gradation By checking the image s RGB histogram you can see the color s saturation and gradation condition and white balance inclination 254 Normal brightness gt Searching for Images Quickly ma Display Multiple Images on One Screen Index Display You can search for images quickly with the index display show
319. t the image will be recorded under the same file number to both the CF and SD cards Also the LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card having the lower number If one of the cards becomes full Card full will be displayed and shooting will be disabled If this happens either replace the card or set the recording method to Standard or Auto switch card and select the card with space remaining to continue shooting 119 M9 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback SSS SS ee ee Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback lf Record func is set to Standard or Auto switch card select the card for recording and playing images lf Record func is set to Rec separately or Rec to multiple select the card for playing images lf Standard or Auto switch card is set Record func card folder sel Select Record play Record func Standard e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Record vec play secure a 7 play then press lt gt 1 Record images to and play E images back from the CF card A Record images to and play images back from the SD card Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the card then press lt gt If Rec separately or Rec to multiple is set Record func card folder sel Select Playback Record func Rec separately Turn the lt amp 3 gt dial to select cia S A Playback then press lt i gt Folder 100E0S5D 1 Play back the
320. t Remote Live View Shooting With EOS Utility provided software p 394 installed in your computer you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely while viewing the computer screen For details refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual p 396 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor ma Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt Z 2 Display the Live View image f e Press the lt Y gt button gt The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the actual image you capture Focus the subject When you press the shutter button halfway the camera will focus with the current AF mode p 209 A Take the picture I Press the shutter button completely gt The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor After the image review ends the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically e Press the lt gt button to end the Live View shooting Fl e The image s field of view is approx 100 when the image recording quality is set to JPEG L e The metering mode will be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting e Inthe lt P Tv Av M B gt shooting modes you can check the depth of field by pressing the depth of field preview button e During continuous shooting the exposure set for the first shot will also be ap
321. t Tv gt Manually set shutter speed and automatically set aperture e lt Av gt Manually set aperture and automatically set shutter speed e lt M gt _ Manually set shutter speed and aperture If highlight tone priority is set the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200 230 Shooting Movies wD e AEB cannot be used e Even if an external Speedlite is used it will not fire Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting However the captured images will not be displayed on the screen Depending on the still photo s image recording quality number of shots during continuous shooting card performance etc movie shooting may stop automatically e If 5 Movie shoot btn is set to 4 89 you cannot take still photos El e f you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting using a high speed card is recommended Setting a smaller image recording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still photos are also recommended e You can shoot still photos in all drive modes e The self timer can be used before you start shooting a movie If used during movie shooting the self timer will switch to single image shooting 231 Shooting Function Settings sxe AF DRIVE WB ISO GI 32 Settings If you press the lt AF DRIVE gt lt L WB gt lt ISO G4 gt lt E gt or lt E4 gt button while the image is displayed on the LCD monitor the set
322. t select 4 Clear all camera settings and 9 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn ir e Even when the Mode Dial is set to lt W gt lt gt or lt gt you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings e By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can check which shooting mode is registered under lt M gt lt gt and lt gt p 342 343 340 14 Reference This chapter provides reference information for camera features system accessories etc INFO Button Functions ma When you press the lt INFO gt button while the camera is ready to shoot you can display Displays camera settings Electronic level p 60 and Displays shooting functions p 343 Under the 3 tab NZA button display Displays camera settings I options enables you to select the options v Electronic level displayed when the lt INFO gt button is pressed Select the desired display option and press Cancel lt 1 gt to append a checkmark lt vV gt e After making the selection select OK then press lt gt F e Note that you cannot remove the lt gt for all three display options e The Displays camera settings sample screen is displayed in English for all languages Even if you uncheck the Electronic level so it does not appear it will still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press the lt INFO gt button Camera Setting
323. t the point of focus to the rear of the standard point of focus AF Microadjustment m e After making the adjustment press Adjust focus for all lenses by lt G gt the same BUUSIMENT amount Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select All by Steals same amount then press lt 7 gt All by same amount 5 The menu will reappear Adjust by lens W 40 1 40 i Change F Clear all 5 Check the result of the adjustment e Take a picture and play back the image p 250 to check the adjustment result When the resulting picture is focused in front of the targeted point adjust toward the At side When the resulting picture is focused behind the targeted point adjust toward the B side e f necessary do the adjustment again 4D If All by same amount is selected AF adjustment will not be possible for the wide angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses 107 ta Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus Se Adjust by Lens You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment has been registered the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount Set the adjustment manually by adjusting shooting and checking the result Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made If you use a zoom lens make the adjustment for the wide angle W and telephoto T en
324. t the center of the viewfinder and the surrounding AF points above below on the right and on the left can be used for autofocusing Only the following AF area selection modes are selectable Single point AF Manual selection Single point Spot AF Manual selection and AF point expansion Manual selection E Cross type AF point Subject g tracking is superior and high 0 a 0 precision focusing is achieved O AF points sensitive to horizontal lines on the right and on the left of the center AF point or vertical lines above and under the center AF point Manual selection is not possible Only available when AF point expansion Manual selection a ig selected Disabled AF points not displayed EF35 105mm 1 4 5 5 6 EF35 105mm f 4 5 5 6 USM 84 Lenses and Usable AF Points Se a e AF when the maximum aperture is f 8 When an extender is attached to the lens AF is possible even when the maximum aperture value is larger than f 5 6 up to f 8 Selectable AF area selection modes are the same as that of group H p 84 EF400mm f 5 6L USM EF400mm f 4 DO IS II USM _ EF70 200mm f 4L USM Extender EF2x Extender EF2x E EF500mm f 4L IS USM EF70 200mm f 4L IS USM Extender EF1 4x F500mm f 4 5L USM Extender EF1 4x EF800mm f 5 6L IS USM EF500mm f 4L IS Il USM EF100 400mm f 4 5 5 6L IS USM 1200mm f 5 6L USM Extender EF1 4x Extender EF2x EF200 400mm f 4L IS USM F300mm f 4L USM Extender EF2x 300
325. t tone priority is set to Enable p 148 the ISO speed will be ISO 200 12800 Under 2 ISO speed settings Auto ISO range and Min shutter spd cannot be set p 129 130 for movie shooting Also ISO speed range cannot be set in the Tv mode Ww If Minimum is set to L 50 and Maximum to H1 51200 or H2 102400 in ISO speed range and you switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting the minimum setting for automatic ISO range will be ISO 100 and the maximum will be H ISO 25600 except in J and Tv shooting modes The ISO speed cannot be expanded to ISO 50 or ISO 51200 102400 223 Shooting Movies SSE Notes for Autoexposure Shutter priority AE and Aperture priority AE Fl e You can lock the exposure AE lock by pressing the lt gt button except in the GF mode p 173 After applying AE lock during movie shooting you can cancel it by pressing the lt gt button AE lock setting is retained until you press lt E gt e You can set exposure compensation by setting the lt LOCK gt switch to the left and turning the lt gt dial except in the lt 3 gt mode e Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter speed at the screen bottom This is the exposure setting for taking a still photo p 227 The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for still photo shooting
326. t with lt gt AP mode One thot AF Evaluative meterig Auto seian 61 pt AF ONESHOT AIFOCUS AISERVO Go Co poo GE oE Drive mode Flash exposure comp Single shocking Pre 5 1 P f naie i T TT oO Ei gi 1 iy Fl If you turn off the power while the Shooting settings display screen is displayed the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again To cancel this press the lt INFO gt button to turn off the screen then turn off the power switch 343 U Checking the Battery Information mam You can check the battery s condition on the LCD monitor Each Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N has a unique serial number and you can register multiple battery packs to the camera When you use this feature you can check the registered battery pack s remaining capacity and operation history GO a DBM o x Select Battery info Video system NTSC O O O O e Under the 3 tab select Battery Sau info then press lt G1 gt button display options gt The battery info screen will appear Battery position Battery model or household power source Battery info being used C P EG The battery level icon p 35 is displayed Remaining cap together with the remaining battery capacity Shutter count shown in 1 increments Recha rf mee SERU PE SSINETEN Shots taken with the current battery The number is reset when the battery is recharged Battery s recharge performance level is
327. tart printing a ES Both e Select Print then press lt gt ii W 1 copies Trimming i H 9x13cm Paper settings E Photo Cancel E Borderless Print ir e With Easy printing you can print another image using the same settings Just select the image and press the lt D gt button With Easy printing the number of copies will always be 1 You cannot set the number of copies Also any trimming p 309 will not be applied e The Default setting for printing effects and other options are the printer s own default settings as set by the printer s manufacturer Refer to the printer s instruction manual to find out what the Default settings are g e Depending on the image s file size and image recording quality it may take some time for the printing to start after you select Print e f image tilt correction p 309 is applied it may take longer to print the image To stop the printing press lt gt while Stop is displayed then select OK e f you execute 4 Clear all camera settings p 56 all the settings will revert to their defaults 307 P Printing Adjustment of Printing Effects Natural M In step 4 on page 306 select the printing ae nro effect When the lt El gt icon is displayed Wy 1 copies brightly next to lt MEA gt you can press the lt INFO gt button You can then adjust ans the printing effect What can be adjusted Adjust levels Off or what is displayed will
328. tes having a color temperature transmission function Otherwise it will be fixed to approx 6000K About White Balance To the human eye a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting With a digital camera the color temperature is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white This adjustment serves as the basis for the color correction The result is natural looking colors in the pictures E You can also set this with 2 White balance 139 WB Setting the White Balance E n Custom White Balance Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy Do this procedure under the actual light source to be used 1 Photograph a white object e The plain white object should fill the spot metering circle Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object e You can set any white balance Spot metering circle Ez 2 Select Custom White Balance Expo comp AEB 3 2 1 L 1 293 e Under the 2 tab select Custom ie seed Sees White Balance then press lt 6 gt Auto Lighting Optimizer ET i White balance FNE The custom white balance selection Custom White Balance screen will appear WE Shift Bkt 0 0 0 3 Import the white balance data Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image captured in step 1 then press lt G gt gt On the dialog screen that appears select OK and the data
329. that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower etc Before cleaning the sensor detach the lens from the camera The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended Oa Fo x Select Sensor cleaning Video system NTSC Under the 3 tab select Sensor Battery info H O l cleaning then press lt gt button display options EE btn function Rating Sensor cleaning 2 Select Clean manually Auto cleaning Disable Select Clean manually then press Clean nowi Clean manually lt gt Clean manually 3 Select OK e Select OK then press lt gt Mirror will lockup Aee nae carina gt In a moment the reflex mirror will sensor turn power switch lockup and the shutter will open sta es e CLn will blink on the LCD panel Cancel OK A Clean the sensor End the cleaning Set the power switch to lt OFF gt 4 If you use a battery make sure it is fully charged If the battery grip with size AA LR6 batteries is attached manual sensor cleaning will not be possible Fl As power source using the AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 sold separately is recommended 299 1 Manual Sensor Cleaning a a e While cleaning the sensor never do any of the following Doing any of the following will cut off the power and close the shutter
330. time You can also set the time zone of your current address Then if you travel to another time zone you can simply set your destination s time zone so that the correct date time will be recorded Display the menu screen e Press the lt MENU gt button to display the menu screen 2 Under the 2 tab select Date Time Zone e Press the lt Q gt button and select the tab e Turn the lt gt dial to select the 2 tab y e Turn the lt amp gt dial to select Date Time Zone then press lt amp gt Auto power off LCD brightness Date Time zone 01 11 Date Time Zone 3 Set the time zone Time zone 00 00 e London is set by default 01 11 2012 13 30 00 e Turn the lt gt dial to select Time mm dd yy zone london e Press lt gt so lt i gt is displayed OK Cancel e Turn the lt gt dial to select the time zone then press lt gt 36 M9 Setting the Date Time and Zone E Date Time Zone A Set the date and time 01 11 2012 e Turn the lt gt dial to select the 01 11 2012 15 30 00 number mm dd yy e Press lt gt so lt gt is displayed New York e Turn the lt gt dial to select the OK Cancel desired setting then press lt gt B Returns to lt 50 gt Date Time Zone 5 Set the daylight saving time Daylight saving time Set if necessary 01 11 2012 15 30 00 Turn the lt 3 gt dial to sel
331. ting information display e You cannot play back movies in the two image display 299 2 Rotating the Image mau You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation O aye Q x 1 Select Rotate image Protect images Under the L gt 1 tab select Rotate Rotate image image then press lt 7 gt Erase images Print order Image copy 2 Select an image e Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image to be rotated e You can also select an image on the index display p 255 3 Rotate the image e Each time you press lt gt the image will rotate clockwise as follows 90 270 0 e To rotate another image repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu F e f you have set 1 Auto rotate to Ont p 286 before taking vertical shots you need not rotate the image as described above e If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback set 1 Auto rotate to On 6 e A movie cannot be rotated 260 Setting Ratings mm You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks L E AJEN This function is called rating Set ratings with the lt RATE gt Button Select an image or movie e During image playback turn the lt gt dial to select an image or movie to be rated You can also select an image or movie on the index display p 255 Rate the image or movie e Each time yo
332. ting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the lt s gt or lt gt dial to set the respective function When AMM is set you can press the lt E gt button to select the AF area selection mode and AF point The procedure is the same as with viewfinder shooting During manual exposure shooting p 225 you can press the lt ISO amp 4 gt button to set the ISO speed Note that the following cannot be set lt gt Metering mode lt 4 gt Flash exposure compensation lt HDR gt HDR mode and lt i gt Multiple exposures Q Quick Control While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor you can press the lt Q gt button and set the following Auto Lighting Optimizer card selection recording function image recording quality still photos movie recording size and sound recording level with Sound recording Manual set 1 Press the lt Q gt button gt The settable functions will be displayed 2 Select a function and set it Use lt gt to select a function gt The setting of the selected function is displayed at the bottom Turn the lt gt or lt gt dial to set it e To set the card selection or recording function press lt gt then turn the lt 3 gt or lt gt dial to set it Fl During movie shooting you can set the following Shutter speed aperture ISO speed exposure compensation and sound recording level Settable functions may differ depending on the s
333. ting under fluorescent or LED lighting image flicker may be recorded 221 Shooting Movies Aperture priority AE When the shooting mode is lt Av gt you can manually set the aperture for movie shooting The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure SAAN 1 Set the Mode Dial to lt Av gt JIE A Set the Live View shooting Movie shooting switch to lt gt 3 Set the desired aperture While looking at the LCD monitor turn the lt gt dial Focus and shoot the movie e The procedure is the same as steps 3 and 4 for Autoexposure Shooting p 220 TRESE IEE en QD Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since variations in the exposure due to the drive of the lens aperture will be recorded 222 Shooting Movies eS _ EEE SESE S ISO speed in the Gf mode e Inthe GJ mode the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 ISO speed in the P Tv Av and B modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 12800 Under i82 ISO speed settings p 128 if you set the ISO speed range s Maximum setting to 25600 H in the P Av or B mode the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H equivalent to ISO 25600 Be aware that when you set Maximum to 25600 the maximum ISO speed will not be expanded and remains ISO 12800 If 3 Highligh
334. to Manual Disable Sound recording Recording level 236 Wind filter Disable Enable Silent LV shooting Mode 1 Mode 2 Disable Metering timer 4 sec 16 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min 30 min 1 In the lt 4J gt mode these menu options are displayed under 92 2 In the lt 4j gt mode it will be Sound recording On Off 43 Shooting 5 Movie Red Count up Start time setting Movie rec count Movie play count HDMI Drop frame E Z 4 In the lt 4J gt mode these menu options are displayed under 33 2 The setting is linked to Movie play count under the L gt 3 tab 361 System Map 600E X MR 14EX I MT 24EX Bundled Dioptric Adjustment Lenses Eg Accessories 4 Ap Anti F og 24 i Eyepiece Eg 5 Pen EED gt Eyecup Eg Angle Finder C Date time Battery Charger eee eeo e o OE Battery Pack Battery Grip Car Battery BG E11 Cable CB 570 Car Battery eLA Charger n pat iai CBC E6 CS 3 AC Adapter DC Coupler Battery Magazine AC E6 DR E6 BG M E1LL for BGM E 11A for AC Adapter Kit P E6 LP E6N _size AA LR6 batteries ACK E6 attached to BG E11 attached to BG E11 362 System Map GPS Receiver Headphones Remote Timer Remote Remote Wireless GP E2 Controller Controller Switch Controller RC 6 TC 80N3 RS 80N3 LC 5 S
335. to 99 Index PIRA SETT Press lt gt to include images with a Checkmark checkmark lt v gt in the index print Index icon Byi Select Mark all in folder and select the folder A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed If you select Clear all in folder and select the folder the print order for that folder will all be canceled All image If you select Mark all on card one copy of all the images on the card will be set for printing If you select Clear all on card the print B order will be cleared for all the images on the card QD e Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order even if you set By E or All image When using a PictBridge printer print no more than 400 images for one print order If you specify more than this all the images may not be printed 313 Direct Printing with DPOF memm Print order ul With a PictBridge printer you can easily Seta print images with DPOF Date File No Sel lmage By All image Set up Print HM 5 1 Prepare to print See page 302 Follow the Connecting the Camera to a Printer procedure up to step 5 2 Under the L 1 tab select Print order 3 Select Print Print will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible A Set the Paper settings p 304 Set the printing effects p 306 if necessary 5 Select OK
336. to Exposure Bracketing AEB cccccccccsssseeeesssseeeeees 172 Me LOKuso eis eg atcatea hs 173 B Bulb Exp s re Seun a A 174 HDR HDR High Dynamic Range Shooting c ccsceeeeee 175 Multiple Exposure S saarn ectiamaie cece ateccen 179 KZ Miror LOCKUP sce aint indvedacvi N enitadie erties 186 Using the Eyepiece Cover ccscecsessensncceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 fp Using a Remote Switch uu cccccceesecsseeecseeecseeeesseeeseeeesaees 187 i Remote Control Shooting sas vccdacedceseeueln da ceaed ered neceaeieends 188 s Flash PHOTOG FA DAY oeeie tensed aar aa iaaah eana a eniai 190 Seting Ihe Flas Mses E N 193 Contents _ _ _ ee rs 7 Shooting with the LCD Monitor Live View Shooting 199 Cs Shooting with the LCD Monitor cccccccccssssceeceessseeeeeeeees 200 Shooting Function Settings eesicsywitiieleons cccaecaneitaveewewernaveccarenans 204 Men Function Settings sarietan aa aaia 205 USNOGARTO FOGUS mie a a E tae nemttneans 209 FOCUSING Manyally enedoir aiea a a aaa iaa 216 MOR Shooting Movies wccso sc Ssesed canes tadcdsinen aadeieasa td csdciaiedeastebcibect ans 220 Autoexposure Shooting 8 ih alos cetainectesttar aca tae nt aacau wraineaneeents 220 Shutter pony AE ice easesienteceaeen dale tra de re reeedee caress Ne canada cuaten tas 221 Aperture priorty AE asinceieceose fescue aa Nu ederearcauiveceddnawtensets 222 Manual Exposure Shooting essc
337. to the HDMI output image e Recording command When you record a movie that is output from HDMI to an external recording device you can synchronize the camera s movie shooting start stop with the external recording device s recording operation On Synchronize external recording device s recording start stop with camera s movie shooting start stop Off Control external device s recording start stop from external recording device WD If the movie recording quality s frame rate p 233 and HDMI output frame rate are set manually to NTSC and PAL frame rates in a combination that does not function properly the time code will not be appended to the HDMI Output image 241 M9 Setting the Time Code a a Drop Frame If the frame rate setting is Io 29 97fps or Ieo 59 94 fps the time code s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and time code This discrepancy can be corrected automatically This correction function is called drop frame Enable The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time code numbers DF Drop frame Disable The discrepancy is not corrected NDF Non drop frame Fl When the frame rate is set to I 23 976fps D5 25 00fps or Iso 50 00fps the drop frame function does not take effect If T4 is set or 3 Video system is set to PAL Drop frame option will not be displayed 242 729 Menu Function Settings m 6 4 Menu t Q Whe
338. ton Metering and AF start or dial then press lt gt a a gt The name of the camera control and Si Lis the assignable functions will be o Default set displayed Shutter butt half press 3 Assign a function Select the function to assign e Turn the lt gt dial to select the Metering start desired function then press lt gt Mar x If the MNA icon appears on the bottom left you can press the lt INFO gt button and set other related options p 330 336 Select the desired option on the screen displayed then press lt amp gt A Exit the setting When you press lt 1 gt to exit the setting the screen in step 2 will reappear Press the lt MENU gt button to exit a El With the screen in step 2 displayed you can press the lt gt button to cancel the Custom Control settings Note that the 4 2 Custom Controls settings will not be canceled even if you select 4 4 Clear all Custom Func C Fn 32 7 4 2 Custom Controls Assignable Functions to Camera Controls SF Function Metering and AF start Page 330 AF ON O 1 On AF OFF AF stop AFe AV Switch to registered AF function ONESHOT AISERVO ONE SHOT Al SERVO 331 Oo Hp Switch to registered AF point 2 AF point direct selection Metering start AE lock AE lock while button pressed 332 332 AE lock hold FE
339. transferred to a personal computer 1 image 10 images 100 images Date Image jump w is Folder Movies Stills Rating ma P Playback gt i Blue Fiohigmaen ere O 1x no magnification 2x magnify from center 4x magnify from center 8x magnify Magnification Approx from center 10x magnify from center Actual size from selected point Same as last magnification from center Control over HDMI Disable Enable The setting is linked to the Time code s Movie play count under the B5 Movie tab 358 Menu Settings Y Set up 1 Yellow Page Record func Standard Auto switch card Record separately Record to Record function card multiple folder selection File numbering Continuous Auto reset Manual reset 156 Preset code User setting 1 User setting 2 154 Auto rotate Ong amp On Off 286 Format card Initialize and erase data on the card 53 Eye Fi settings Displayed when a commercially available Eye 350 Fi card is inserted Y Set up 2 Yellow 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min 15 min 30 min Disable Auto Adjustable to one of three brightness levels BCE PHOnInES Manual Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels Paa Date year month day Time hour min sec Daylight saving time Time zone Auto power off Date Time Zone VF grid display Disable Enable Settings available when the GPS Receiver GP E2 sold sep
340. tting the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set in the lt M gt mode 144 mM Noise Reduction Settings mm High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds At low ISO speeds the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced Ba E o Q x 1 Select High ISO speed NR SHEHIA Picture Style Auto e Under the 483 tab select High ISO Long exp noise reduction OFF speed NR then press lt 67 gt High ISO speed NR i Highlight tone priority OFF Dust Delete Data Multiple exposure Disable HDR Mode Disable HDR High ISO speed NR Set the desired setting Standard mT e Turn the lt gt dial to select the ae a desired noise reduction setting then Disable OFF press lt gt Reduce Image noise Especially gt The setting screen closes and the effective at high ISO speeds i menu will reappear 3 Take the picture e The image will be recorded with noise reduction applied F If you play back a image with the camera the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal Check the noise reduction effect with Digital Photo Professional provided software p 394 145 TAM Noise Reduction Settings Long Exposure Noise Reduction Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec or longer Goar oy Q 1 Select Long exp noise Picture Style Aut
341. tting will be Same for both vert horiz Also your settings for the three camera orientations will be cleared and all three will revert to Single point AF Manual selection with the center AF point selected e f you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group p 79 85 especially Group H the setting may be cleared 103 tM Customizing AF Functions Ea AF5 Manual AF point selection pattern During manual AF point selection the selection can either stop at the outer edge or it can move to the opposite AF point This function works in AF area selection modes other than 61 point automatic selection AF and Zone AF It works in 61 point automatic selection AF only with Al Servo AF Manual AF pt selec pattern Soca a Stops at AF area edges Stops at AF area edges Tacit Convenient if you often use an AF point dabaa along the edge ta Continuous Instead of stopping at the outer edge the selected AF point continues to the opposite side AF point display during focus You can set whether or not to display the AF point s in the following cases 1 When selecting the AF point s 2 When the camera is ready to shoot before AF operation 3 During AF operation and 4 When focus is achieved AF point display during focus ito Selected constant Sece constant ic The selected AF point s is always il constant mim f Selected pre AF focused displayed Selected focused NA miw All constant sab
342. ttons on the camera back and the lt gt lt gt dials lt MENU gt button j LCD monitor lt gt Main Dial lt 3 gt Quick Control Dial lt 1 gt button Canon lt Q gt button Image quality Image review 2 Sec Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Lens aberration correction Some menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the lt 3 gt mode P Tv Av M B Mode Menu Screen gt Playback AF AF O Shooting Y Set up Q Custom Functions XK My Menu C Fock a Main tabs Secondary aa tabs Image quality Image review 2 SEC Beep Enable Release shutter without card ON Menu settings Menu items Lens aberration correction External Speedlite control Mirror lockup 51 tE Menu Operations SSS SSS Menu Setting Procedure EAEE TEE 1 Display the menu screen image quality e Press the lt MENU gt button to display Image review 2 SEC Beep Enable the menu screen Lens aberration correction External Speedlite control e Each time you press the lt Q gt button Mirror lockup OFF Release shutter without card ON 2 Select a tab the main tab will switch e Turn the lt gt dial to select a secondary tab e For example the 284 tab refers to the screen displayed when the 8 Shooting tab s fourth dot from the left is selected G a Ef Q x 3 Select the desired item SHOOTAILY
343. ty Precautions i Follow the cautions below Otherwise physical injury AN Cautions or property damage may result e Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source The product may become hot and cause skin burns Doing so may also cause battery leakage or explosion which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the product e Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod Doing so may cause injury Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens e Do not leave the product in a low temperature environment for an extended period of time The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched e Never play the provided CD ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD ROM If you use it in a music CD player you may damage the speakers and other components When using headphones there is also a risk of injury to your ears from excessively loud volume Digital Camera Model DS126321 Systems This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital devices pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide rea
344. u press the lt RATE gt button the rating mark will change E L4 E2 B4 None e To rate another image or movie repeat steps 1 and 2 F lf 3 btn function is set to Protect change it to Rating e f you press the lt Q gt button when Rating is selected in 3 btn function you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you press the lt RATE gt button tM Set ratings with the menu AF rok Select Rating Resize e Under the 12 tab select Rating Rating then press lt gt Slide show Image transfer Image jump wia 261 Setting Ratings el 2 Select an image or movie Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the image or movie to be rated e If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt s gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image or movie from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt s73 gt dial clockwise 3 Rate the image or movie e Pressing lt gt will turn off the RHS icon e Turn the lt gt dial to select a rating gt The total number of images and movies rated will be counted for each rating e To rate another image or movie repeat steps 2 and 3 e Press the lt MENU gt button to return to the menu F The total number of images with a given rating can be displayed up to 999 If there are more than 999 images with a given rating will be displayed for
345. uam Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at one time Protect images i Under P 1 Protect images when Select images you select All images in folder or All All images in folder images on card all the images in the Unprotect all images in folder ATES caved folder or on a card will be protected Unprotect all images on card To cancel the image protection select Unprotect all images in folder or Unprotect all images on card WE NL Ba Set with the lt RATE gt Button During image playback you can use the lt RATE gt button to protect an image btn function Set 3 btn function to Rating Protect e Play back the images and select the image to be protected When you press the lt RATE gt button the image will be protected and the lt e gt icon will appear at the top of the screen To cancel the image protection press the lt RATE gt button again The lt e gt icon will disappear WD If you format the card p 53 the protected images will also be erased ir e Movies can also be protected Once an image is protected it cannot be erased by the camera s erase function To erase a protected image you must first cancel the protection e f you erase all the images p 284 only the protected images will remain This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once 2 9 Copying Images sx The images re
346. uds or green trees stand out Filter effect Or Orange R Red more G Green Filter Sample Effects Normal black and white image with no filter effects The blue sky will look more natural and the white clouds will look Ye Yellow crisper Or Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker The sunset will look more brilliant The blue sky will look quite dark Fall leaves will look crisper and R Red brighter Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter Fl Increasing the Contrast will make the filter effect more pronounced Toning Effect Detail set mM Monochrome By applying a toning effect you can IN None create a monochrome image in that sa color It can make the image look more Toning effect P Purple Impressive G Green The following can be selected N None S Sepia B Blue P Purple or G Green 136 313 Registering a Picture Style mau You can select a base Picture Style such as Portrait or Landscape adjust its parameters as desired and register it under User Def 1 User Def 2 or User Def 3 You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as sharpness and contrast are different You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility provided software p 394 1 Press the lt C gt button Select 242 Turn the lt gt dial to select
347. uivalent Wireless File Transmitter WFT E7 GPS Receiver GP E2 connection HDMI mini OUT terminal Type C Auto switching of resolution CEC compatible 384 Specifications External microphone IN terminal 3 5 mm stereo mini jack Headphone terminal 3 5mm stereo mini jack Remote control terminal Compatible with N3 type remote controller Wireless remote control Remote Controller RC 6 Eye Fi card Compatible e Power Battery Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N Quantity 1 AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK E6 With Battery Grip BG E11 attached size AA LR6 batteries can be used Battery information Remaining capacity Shutter count Recharge performance and Battery registration possible Battery life With viewfinder shooting Based on CIPA Approx 950 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 850 shots at testing standards 0 C 32 F With Live View shooting Approx 200 shots at 23 C 73 F approx 180 shots at 0 C 32 F Movie shooting time Approx 1 hr 30 min at 23 C 73 F Approx 1 hr 20 min at 0 C 32 F With fully charged Battery Pack LP E6 Date Time battery CR1616 lithium battery Quantity 1 e Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 152 0 x 116 4 x 76 4 mm 6 0 x 4 6 x 3 0 in Weight Approx 950 g 33 5 oz CIPA Guidelines Approx 860 g 30 3 oz Body only Operation Environment Working temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Working humidity 85 or less
348. used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decoding MPEG 4 compliant video that was encoded only 1 for a personal and non commercial purpose or 2 by a video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard Notice displayed in English as required 387 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis QD Battery Pack LP E6 LP E6N is dedicated to Canon products only Using it with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable 388 Safety Precautions mE The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to yourself and others Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow these precautions before using the product If you experience any malfunctions problems or damage to the product contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer from whom you
349. uto cee eee 67 3 Setting the AF and Drive Modes 69 AF Selecting the AF Mode cccccccccssccssccssceseesseceseeseceecneecseeees 70 Selecting the AF Area cccccccccscccssccscsseceecessecssecseesseecssesseeees 72 AF Area Selection Modes wieciceuvcaietuuscareyataiseais uadeeueseiedncsiuavceenenceeds 75 ADOUPIRE AP SONSOM aane aaa a a 78 Lenses and Usable AF POInts cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject 0 87 CUSTOMIZING AF FUNCIONS siene seamen laced E AEA 96 Fine Adjustment of AF s Point of Focus AF Microadjustment 106 When Autofocus Fails iseni aia an aian iaia aaiae 112 MF Manual FOCUSING n arnraien aa 113 Selecting the Drive MOde ccccccsscssessssessessessessessessecseeaes 114 Using the Self timer nonnnnennsnnnnnnnennnsnnnnerinsrnaninsrnnsrinerrnsni 115 4 Image Settings 117 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ccee 118 Setting the Image Recording Quality ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 ISO2 Setting the S Speedin215 6c ewe one ee hearted 126 343 Selecting a Picture OLY Oncweity ences nsiemcaineceilee ied 131 Sa Customizing a Picture Style ccesecsseeeseeseesteeeseeeeeens 134 34 Registering a Picture Style caine scents hee 137 WB Setting the White Balance cccccccccsecssccssesseseseeeseeseeees 139 n Custom White Balance cc csssc
350. uto Lighting Optimizer to Disable When Standard Low High is set even if you set a decreased exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation the image may come out bright p 171 The Live View image or movie shooting image is not displayed during multiple exposure shooting e If On ContShtng is set Live View display image review after image capture and image playback are not possible during shooting p 179 The multiple exposure image is shot in quality When the image recording quality is set to M or S GM the multiple exposure image will be recorded in quality p 185 When I use the lt Av gt mode with flash the shutter speed becomes slow e f you shoot at night when the background is dark the shutter speed becomes slow automatically slow sync shooting so that both the subject and background are properly exposed To prevent a slow shutter speed under 1 External Speedlite control set Flash sync speed in Av mode to 1 200 1 60 sec auto or 1 200 sec fixed p 194 The flash does not fire e Make sure the flash or PC sync cord is securely attached to the camera If you use a non Canon flash unit with Live View shooting set 6 4 Silent LV shoot to Disable p 208 368 Troubleshooting Guide UE The flash always fires at full output e f you use a flash unit other than an EX series Speedlite the flash will always be fired at full output p 191 e When the Flash m
351. vo AF Characteristics For a Subject a a SS Sa ne Se a aes Accel decel tracking oF Q 4 This sets the tracking sensitivity for ATAF ocerPiqn foot n ars zi moving subjects whose speed can k Versatile multi purpose suddenly change dramatically by starting _ or stopping suddenly etc Accel decel tracking o a aad ED Help 0 Suited for subjects that move at a fixed speed 2 1 Effective for subjects having sudden movements sudden acceleration deceleration or sudden stops Even if the moving subject s speed suddenly changes dramatically the camera continues to focus the target subject For example for an approaching subject the camera becomes less prone to focus behind it which would result in a blurred subject For a subject stopping suddenly the camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it Setting 2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject s speed better than with 1 However since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the subject the focusing may be unstable momentarily 93 tM Selecting Al Servo AF Characteristics For a Subject SSS SSS SSS SS SS e AF pt auto switching O AP E a Versatile multi purpose RE setting oF AF pt auto switching O o n i Help 0 This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject moving dramatically up down left or right This setting takes effect in the foll
352. w Under the L gt 2 tab select Slide show then press lt gt Number of images to be played 2 Select the images to be played Slide show wW Yi ice 46 images i All images Pap Em 2 Set up Start ME NU 5 Select date ooz z o1ow20172 8 a iF a Ur a WANI Wi Sot en a i Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select the desired option then press lt gt All images Movies Stills Turn the lt gt dial to select one of the following All images Movies Stills Then press lt gt Date Folder Rating e Turn the lt gt dial to select one of the following EF Date fa Folder x Rating e When lt M gt is highlighted press the lt INFO gt button e Turn the lt gt dial to select the desired setting then press lt 6 gt Folder Rating Select folder 0 100EOSSD 25 10160550 9 a 2 1 u Slide Show Auto Playback tem Playback Description All images eee still photos and movies on the card will be played Date Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played back Movies Only the movies on the card will be played back Only the still photos on the card will be played back Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating Rating will be played back Slide show m 3 Set the play time and repeat ANTE 46 images option
353. will be imported When the menu reappears press the lt MENU gt button to exit the menu 4 Press the lt WB gt button 46 Select the custom white balance e Look at the LCD panel and turn the lt gt dial to select lt gt WB Setting the White Balance EE WD e Ifthe exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure a correct white balance may not be obtained e In step 3 the following images cannot be selected images captured while the Picture Style was set to Monochrome multiple exposure images and images taken with another camera ir Instead of a white object an 18 gray card commercially available can produce a more accurate white balance e The personal white balance registered with the provided software will be registered under lt n gt If you execute step 3 the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased 4 Setting the Color Temperature You can set the white balance s color temperature numerically in kelvins This is for advanced users G a E e Q k 1 Select White balance Expo comp AEB RAIHA e Under the 2 tab select White ISO speed settings Auto Lighting Optimizer FE balance then pean lt gt White balance RNE White balance 2 Set the color temperature Color temp e Turn the lt gt dial to select C4 e Turn the lt gt dial to set the color mE S EEEE temperature then press lt 1 gt
354. wly formatted card each time File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder File numbering is reset Manual Reset To reset the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder When you reset the file numbering manually a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001 This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today for example After the manual reset the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen 4D If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999 shooting will not be possible even if the card still has storage capacity The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card Replace it with a new card 157 m Setting Copyright Information mau When you set the copyright information it will be recorded to the image as Exif information on o x 1 Select Copyright information Per SET Lea Custom shoating mode C1 C3 e Under the f4 tab select Copyright Clear all camera settings lomia nomon information then press lt gt firmware ver 1 0 0 Copyright information 2 Select the option to be set lay copyright e Turn the lt gt dial select either Sa i Enter author s name or Enter copyright details then press lt 6 gt
355. y You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation If the AEB range exceeds 3 stops the end of the exposure level indicator will display lt 4 gt or lt gt AEB cannot be set for bulb exposures or used with flash AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to lt OFF gt or when the flash is ready to fire 172 AE Lock me Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting Press the lt gt button to lock the exposure then recompose and take the shot This is called AE lock It is effective for backlit subjects Focus the subject Press the shutter button halfway gt The exposure setting will be displayed 2 Press the lt gt button 64 gt The lt gt icon lights up in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked AE lock e Each time you press the lt gt button it locks the current autoexposure setting Recompose and take the picture e f you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots hold down the lt gt button and press the shutter button to take another shot AE Lock Effects Metering Mode AF Point Selection Method p 74 p 169 Automatic Selection Manual Selection DE AE lock is applied at the AF AE lock is applied at the ie point that achieved focus selected AF point SJ eJ CJ AE lo
356. y back the image to be erased A 2 Press the lt 1 gt button gt The Erase menu will appear at the bottom of the screen Erase the image Turn the lt 3 gt dial to select Erase then press lt gt The image displayed will be erased Cancel g When you set 2 3 Default Erase option to Erase selected you can erase images quicker p 326 M Checkmarking lt v gt Images to be Erased in a Batch By appending lt v gt checkmarks to the images to be erased you can erase multiple images at one time oA Me 8 Select Erase images Protect images i e Under the L gt 1 tab select Erase Rotate image i tae aes images then press lt 1 gt Print order image copy 283 t Erasing Images Erase images Select and erase images All images in folder All images on card Mbae HMS Erase images Erase selected images Cancel 2 Select Select and erase images Select Select and erase images then press lt gt gt The images will be displayed If you press the lt Q gt button and turn the lt 2 gt dial counterclockwise you can select an image from a three image display To return to the single image display turn the lt s gt dial clockwise 3 Select the images to be erased e Turn the lt gt dial to select the image to be erased then press lt G1 gt gt A lt V gt checkmark will be displayed on the u
357. yed By pressing the lt INFO gt button you can display only the Live View image After you shoot the set number of exposures multiple exposure shooting will be canceled With continuous shooting after you finish shooting the set number of exposures while holding down the shutter button the shooting will stop With multiple exposures the more exposures there are the more noticeable the noise irregular colors and banding will be Also as noise increases with higher ISO speeds shooting at low ISO speeds is recommended If Additive is set the image processing after taking the multiple exposures will take time The access lamp will light up for longer than usual If you perform Live View shooting while On Func Ctrl and Additive are both set the Live View function will stop automatically when the multiple exposure shooting ends In step 9 the brightness and noise of the multiple exposure image displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final multiple exposure image recorded lf On ContShtng is set let go of the shutter button after shooting the set number of exposures lf the power switch is set to lt OFF gt or the battery is replaced after you set multiple exposure settings multiple exposure shooting will be canceled If you switch the shooting mode to lt gt lt gt while shooting multiple exposure shooting will end When multiple exposure is set or during multiple exposure shootin

5D Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents